FreeCAD 1.0 in 25 Days: Create CAD Models, Assemblies & Drawings

1. Introduction: Are you ready to turn your creative ideas into detailed TD models? Whether you are an aspiring engineer, a designer, or a hobbyist, this free cad modeling course is designed just for you. Free CAD is a powerful, open source and totally free tool that gives you the freedom to design without limits. However, like any other tool, it requires the right guidance to unlock its full potential. In this course, you will learn how to create precise three D models. You will learn how to create sketches, choose those sketches to create physical bodies, then create technical drawings of those parts, and you will also learn how to conduct FM analysis in Free Cat. I'll walk you through each step making show you understand how to carry out every action. This is going to be a project based course, where instead of going over what each tool in free CAT does, you will learn these tools by working on CAD models of actual objects in a hands on approach with one project every day. However, you can do it faster if you have time, It is totally up to you. So why should we use Free cat? Be free cat is user friendly. It is customizable, and best of all, it is completely free. There are no expensive licenses required and no hidden costs like other CAD packages, just pure creativity. So whether you're looking to enhance your career, you are starting a new hobby or just want to bring your ideas to life. This course is the perfect starting point in computer ded design for you. So join us and let's create something amazing together. Sign up today and start your journey into the world of TD CAD modeling, choosing free cat. See you in the course. 2. Downloading & Installation: So first thing that we need to do is to download free cad. Okay? So for that, you need to head over to Google or whatever search engine you're using and just type Freecad. Okay. And this link will pop up www.frecad.org. This is the official website. You can also download it from other websites like sourceforge et cetera, but make sure that the source from where you're downloading is trustworthy and it's not infected with some viruses, et cetera. Still, it is most appropriate and recommended to download it from official website. Let's double click on that and you can just click over here on Download now. Okay. Over here, now you can select the platform for which you want to download. If you are on Windows, you would obviously select this on Max, you would select this whether you are using Apple Silicon or Intel Mac. Or if you're on Linux, you can go for any one of these options R Best or X 86 or 64 space X 64 best Linux system. Okay. So I'm on Windows, so I will select this option. You can also choose the portable option, which is in the seven zip archive format. You can also download that as well. And you have to remember that make sure that Windows eight is the minimum operating system required to run it. Okay? So Windows XP or Windows seven won't work. However, they are very old and I don't think anyone uses that nowadays. So I will just click on this one, and the downloading will start momentarily. It has started over here. However, I'm just going to stop it because I already have downloaded the software. Okay. Also, as you know that free cad is an open source and totally free software, you don't need to pay anything. However, if you want to pay or donate some money out of the goodness of your heart, you can do so by clicking this button. Okay? So I have already downloaded it, so I will go to here Downloads programs, and here it is free cad. Okay. Let's just don't focus on this thing. Okay? So this is the free cad setup. I'll just double click on it to start installation and click yes. Okay. And now here we are. So just click next, obviously. Then this is the license agreement. If you want to read it, you can. I will just click Next and by clicking next, it means that you are basically accepting the license agreement. Now you can choose to install for all of the users that are on your computer or just for the one user you're choosing from by which user you are using your computer right now. Okay. So I'll click this option. Okay. And then select the destination folder where to install, and then click next. Okay. So here you have three components like free cut software, file associations and a desktop shortcut. I will keep them all on and click next and then click Next, and it will take a couple of minutes or seconds depending on the speed of your computer to install. Okay. And obviously, it's going to take some time, so I'll just skip forward to the moment where it has install the software. So here it is the free cat 1.0 has been installed, and I can either click on this button to launch the software once I click this finish button, or we can uncheck it and launch the software ourselves by just unchecking this option over here, this box over here, click on Finish. And now, if you selected the option to create a desktop, shortcut, now, if you go to desktop, you will see this shortcut over here. Okay. So this was all about downloading and installing free cat. The next lecture will be about CAD workflow, and then we will move on to using frecad step by step. Thank you. 3. CAD Modelling Workflow: So in this lecture, we will talk about CAD modeling workflow. And this is not specific to free cad. The methodology is same in almost not almost in all of the CAD software, whether it is solid works, Catia, or whatever. Okay. And it is basically, for example, let's say you want to create a CAD model of a bottle. Okay? So this bottle is going to look something like this. Okay? So there is going to be the bottle itself. Okay. Let's say this is the bottle. Okay. This is the bottom. And there is going to be a cap on top of this bottle. Part on my drink basically, in CAD, both of these components, this bottle itself and this lid or cap, whatever you want to call it, they are going to be cared as parts. So this would be part one. This would be part two. Okay. Now you can create both of these objects, this bottle and are in a single free CAD document or any other CAD software document or file. However, it is better practice to create them in the form of assembly. Okay. Assembly basically is combination of two or more than two parts that are combined to one another using mats. We will study these things and how to create assemblies in its own sections. Okay. So this bottle, this entire bottle would be considered an assembly where this cap and this bottle down the bottom part of this bottle are going to be its two parts. Okay. So methodology basically goes something like this. We create part models, okay? Part models. And then if we are only desiring to create part models, then we will just create a part model and our project over there. However, if we want to create a model of a geometry, sorry, model of an assembly which has more than one parts like this, then we will first create different part models like this gap and this portal, and then we will use those parts to create assembly. Okay. So basically, our majority of the focus is going to be spent over here, creating part models. And then we will learn how to create assemblies from those parts. Okay. Now the question comes, how card modeling workflow or how cared models of parts are created. Okay? So for every object, let's say you want to create a three D cared model of a cube. Okay let's not go for a cube. Let's take this gap over here. Okay? So this caps looks something like this. Okay. So for this gap, first, you will have to create two D sketch. Okay? And then you will use something called features to convert this two D sketch into three D model or three D geometry. In case of this gap, the first two dimensional sketch could not be it most likely would be a circle. So you will create a circle, then you will choose a feature called pad in free cad to convert this two dimensional circle into a three dimensional body. So it will start to begin it will begin to look something like this. Okay. Then you will have to remove material to make the shape of a cap from inside, so you will create another two dimensional sketch over here or on the bottom surface, okay? And then you will use that sketch to remove material. Okay? And you will use pocket feature for removing material. Okay. So basically, your model will be created by a combination of sketches and then features. Okay? So this is how CAD workflow usually or this is basically the cad workflow and how CAD models are created. Now one thing to remember is that there are always more than one way to create a single model. If you look at this cap once again, we can either create it by creating this circle as I just explained over here, then using the pad feature, then removing the material by using the pocket feature. Wherever there are many features. So another methodology or approach you can choose to create this cap model could be like you create a sketch that looks something like this instead of a circle, you create a two dimensional sketch looking like this. Then you choose another feature called revolve feature, which will basically take this sketch two dimensional sketch, revolve it around 360 degrees. To create the model of a ca. So it basically depends on your approach. There is no one singular way or single method to create a specific card model. Okay? So to sum it all up, you need models, part models to create assemblies, and a part model is created by first creating a two dimensional sketch and then using tools cared features to convert that two D sketch into three dimensional body. You can use features to add material. And also you can use them to remove material depending on your need. Okay. So this was all for this lecture. In the next lecture, we will go over the user interface of free get. Thank you. 4. Introduction to FreeCAD: Okay. So when the first time you launch free kid, you will be greeted by this screen. This is basically the splash screen of free. Here you can choose the language, unit system, and navigation style. We will go over the navigation in detail in next lecture. Okay. However, you can either pick these things right now, unit systems like millimeter kilogram, second. These are the different units for measurements used in free cat while creating different type of models. Okay? So standard is millimeter kilogram and second, meaning for length, millimeter, for mass kilogram and for time, seconds. However, you can still change these things later as well. Another thing you can choose right now is to change or select theme. You can either select free cad Light or free cad dark, which looks something like this. I will keep it on free cad Light. Then simply click Done. So this would be then from now on, when you close free cad and then open free card once again, you'll be greeted by this screen instead of splash screen. That splash screen only opens or only appears the first time when you start free care. Okay. So this is basically the start page. Here you can create different files like parametric part, assemblies, two D draft, BIM and architecture, an empty free cad file or open an existing file. And there are also some examples over here as well fread models. So this is a good time to explain how free cat basically works. In the previous lecture, we described the methodology or workflow of CAD modeling. Basically, you first need to create a sketch, then use features to create geometries, three dimensional geometries to create parts, and then you can create assemblies from those parts as well. Okay. In free cad, to do all of these separate functions to carry out the separate functions like creating sketches, creating part models by using features and creating assemblies, we have different work benches. You can select which work bench you want to use by simply going over here. Okay? So let me zoom in. You can see it over here. Currently, it says part design. You can left click on that to select other Workbench, as well, you have a sketcher over here which is used for sketching. This part and part design are used for creating creating three digometries by using features on sketches created in sketcher workbench. You have other over here as well like FEM for finite element methods. You have CAM workbench for computer added manufacturing, BIM for architecture, and drafting for creating drawings and many other as well. Okay? So when creating a card model, we will obviously we can either go start with the sketcher and then move on after creating the sketch, move on to part design. However, the actual workflow inside free care is a bit different. You can just select directly go to select the part design, Workbench, and obviously, free cat knows that to create a part, you need a sketch. Okay? So it will obviously first shift you to sketcher and then you create the sketch, and then it will move you back to the part design workbench. Okay. So basically, you can select workbenches over here. Okay. And also, if you want to create a part file over here, this will directly open a new free care document with part design workbench. For assemblies, you would select this option for creating ranks, this one, and you have basically the same options of these workbenches over here as well. Okay. In this course, we will go over parametric part part design workbench, we will work with sketcher, assembly, drafting and finite element method workbench. So which is over here. So most of the time we'll be using this part design workbench. Let's go over there. We will simply left click and by left clicking, it will create a new free gad, Document. Okay. So now, once you create a free cat document in part design workbench, your screen would look something like this. Over here, you will have this entire portion. This portion is called as viewport. Okay. So whatever you create is going to be displayed over here. Okay. And on top over here, you have some options, these features like pad, revolution, and pocket, et cetera, which we mentioned in the previous lecture. Okay. On this side, okay, this is this side over here. This side, you have tasks and model. So you have one tab for tasks and one tab for model. If you go over to model, here, everything you create will be displayed in the form of a design. Like you create sketch one, that would be displayed over here. Then if you apply some feature on that sketch that feature would be displayed over here. Under tasks, the free cat basically is telling you which tasks you need to carry out. Okay. So under helper tool over here, it tells you what you need to do to basically create a model. Okay, depending on the workbench you have selected. So we've created a free cat document using part design workbench. So obviously, it is asking us to create a sketch. And if we left click on this sketch and zoom out a bit, we will move these plans will appear in viewport. Okay. So these plans, basically we will go into detail in next lecture while creating our first model. So you will select a plan. Let's select this plan. Okay, now this plan is selected. And once I selected that plan, the workbench automatically changed to sketcher. Because we have now selected a plan to create our sketch on. So free cat, when we were in part design workbench, it was telling us to create a sketch. That is the task we need to carry on. And for that, we had to select a plan. And now we have selected a plan, we are now in the sketcher workbench to create a sketch. Let's say we create a simple rectangle. Let's simply create a rectangle over here. Click on Close button over here under tasks, close, then we can click on pad. Let's click on this button over here over here. Okay. So once we closed out of the sketch, the free cat automatically moved us from the sketcher workbench to part design workbench, as you can see over here. Okay? And now we select this pad tool. It is creating a three dimensional body. Let's click Okay, and now we have a three dimensional geometry. Okay? Now, if we go to model, as you can see over here, we have a pad. This means that under model in this design tree, this entire tree is card as design tree, the drop down menus. So we have pad over here because that is the feature we used. Now, if you expand it by clicking on this button, you will see a sketch. Okay. So this is basically the sketch on which we applied this pad feature. Okay? And you can see it over here. So now if we create another sketch, then that sketch would appear over here as well. And then if we apply another feature, that feature would display over here as well. Okay. And one thing to note is that the free cad is a parametric model. Okay, parametric modeling software. So what does that basically mean? So let's say now I select this surface, go to tasks. Then under task, we have different tasks which we can carry out right now. I just want to create another sketch. So I will select this sketch option, create sketch. It will change, move us again back to sketcher workbench. Let's say I create a circle over here. Let's create a circle, something like this. Click Close. Now select pad once again and click Okay. Okay. Now if you go to model, okay, we have this different this is the original pad feature and now we have the pad 1.001, which is for this cylinder. Now what we can do, since free kid is a parametric modeling software, we can go to any one of these options or any one of these entries in our design tree. Let's say you want to change the dimensions of this sketch or how this sketch actually looks like. You can just click on this sketch. Left click to select this sketch, go to tasks, okay. Or sorry, right click on this sketch, and over here, you would see dit sketch. Okay? If you do that, let's left click on that. And let's say we delete this line. So you simply select this line with left click, press the delete key. Okay. And then select this line tool over here. We will go over the detail of all of these tools in future lecture. So I'll just select this line tool. Okay. Let's create something like this. Okay. So now that sketch has changed. Now if I close it, and as you can see, free cat automatically knew that on this sketch which we have just edited right now, this pad feature was applied. Okay? So it automatically applied the pad feature to this sketch without asking us. Basically, this is what a parametric software means. Okay? So this is all about the user interface and a basic introduction to free care. Thank you. 5. Navigation in FreeCAD: So in this lecture, we are going to learn how to navigate in free care. Okay? The first methodology to navigate in free cat is by using this view cube over here. Okay? And you can find this view cube in the top right side of top right corner of the view board. It is over here. You can basically left click on any one of these surfaces and free cat will directly change its view to that surface. Let's say if I click on this top surface, which says top over here, left click. And now, as you can see, the free cat has moved the model directly to that top view. Okay. And if I select, let's say this small surface over here like this, it will rotate it once again. Now if I select front, it will change its view to front view. You can also rotate the model by clicking on these arrows, rotate left, rotate to the right, rotate to the bottom and rotate up. This should be rotate down and rotate up, not bottom. Okay. So you can also rotate the model in clockwise and anticlockwise direction as well by using these arrows. These ones. So this one would rotate the model in counterclockwise direction and this one would rotate it in clockwise direction. Like this, as you can see over here. You have this small circle over here as well. If you click on that, it will directly or it will basically invert the view of whatever you are on. For example, if we are if I click now, now I'm at the bottom view. If I select this button, I've directly moved to the top view. So to see the opposite side of your model from the perspective of whatever view you are on right now, you can simply collect on this small circle over here. And let me change it to something like this. If you left click on this cube over here, the small cube next to the view cube over here, this one, and if you click on that, it will open a lot of these options. Currently, we are in orthographic view. You can choose to either stay orthographic view or you can also change it to perspective view. Okay? And let me zoom out. Now we are in perspective view. Okay? And to move back to orthographic view, you can either use these V B and VO hot keys or just left click on this cube and select orthographic view. You can also click on this cube to go to isometric view and it will change its view to isometric view in just an instant. Okay. You have other options over here as well like fit all. If you select fit all, the model moves to the center and basically tries to fit itself to the it tries to fit everything inside this viewpot. And if you select Fit selection, then if you have, let's say, more than one bodies or the more than one feature, it will try to focus on that selected feature. For example, let's say, I left click on this face, now select click on this cube and click Fit Selection. Okay. Now, since this is just one body, so fit all and fit selection is basically the same while creating assemblies, et cetera, where you will have more than one bodies or in multibodies parts as well, you can use the fit selection if you want to visualize or concentrate your focus on a specific part. Okay. So that is how to use this VwQuue. The second methodology to navigate in free cad is using hot keys. Okay. And for hot keys, there are many systems, basically. Okay. So currently, as you can see over here, it says CAD over here. Okay? Here. And if I hover on this CAD for a couple of seconds, it shows the CAD navigation style, which is left mouse button to select, mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Right mouse button and middle mouse button to rotate and also middle mouse button and left mouse button to rotate and also panning. So basically, it means if you are on this scared navigation system, you will use the left mouse button to select whatever you are selecting. Middle mouse button, move the middle mouse button and forward direction to zoom in in the backward direction to zoom out. For panning, you will have to press the middle mouse button and then move around. Okay. And for rotating, you will need to press the left mouse button and then middle mouse button and then start working. Oh, sorry. For rotating, you will need to press the shift key and then the middle mouse button. Not working once again. Sorry. Shift key and left mouse button. Sorry. Okay. So I don't usually use the cared navigation style, so I'm struggling to understand it myself. So it is shift mouse button, then the left mouse button, and then you can move around to rotate around the model. Okay. And this rotation is basically around the point where you are cursor. For example, if I press my cursor over here to this corner. Okay? Now, if I press the shift key, then the left mouse button, the icon changes to rotate. And then if I rotate, it rotates around that point. You can see that point as this pinkish circle over here. Okay? And now if I move the mouse pointer to let's say over here, now if I press the shift key then left mouse button and rotate, it will rotate the model around that point. Okay. So this is cad navigation style. You can also change this navigation style. If you just left click and you will have options to change it to any other navigation style. If I change it to Blender, now Blender is very simplistic and I like the Blender navigation style out of all of these. Okay. So Blender is basically for Zoom, it is the same. Zoom in, move the mouse wheel forward, and zoom out, move the mouse wheel backward. Rotating, press middle mouse button and then move around to rotate. And for panning, shift key and then press the middle mouse button and then move around to Pan. Okay. However, if you want to choose some other navigation systems, you can do so as well. Also have options to use gestures if you are using a touchpad. You have Maya gestures, which are basically the gestures used in Autodisk Maya software. We have from Open inventor, which are basically Autodisk inventors navigation system, avet Tinkercad, touchpad, and many others. Okay. And you can also go to settings and create your own Sorry, you can't create wrong. Okay. So sorry on that. Okay. So basically, these are different navigation systems. So I would recommend either using blender or card navigation systems. Okay. If you have used blender in the past, this blender navigation system will feel very easy to understand. And out of all of these, it is the most intuitive, in my opinion. However, it all your choice. If you have used rabbit or Ivenor, feel free to use those navigation systems as well, however, in this course, I will be using blender navigation systems, so I will change it to blender. Okay. And one more thing. Whenever I press a key, you can see which key I'm pressing over here. Okay. So if you want to understand while creating any model like let's say, I press any key to activate a hot key for a specific feature, you would see that key appearing over here. So this was all for this lecture, how to navigate in blender. And in the next lecture, we will start creating part models. Thank you. 6. Day 1: Part Modelling - Simple Cube: So in this video, we are going to be creating our very first model in free kid. And that is going to be this very simplistic cube with rounded edges. Okay. So let's close this. I will close it. Click on this card. I don't want to save it, and we will move to this startup screen. So since we are going to be creating a model, a physical three dimensional geometry, which is going to be basically apart. We're basically creating apart. So we need to create a free cat document in part design workbench. And for that, we have option over here under parametric part. Create apart with part design workbench. Let's left click on that and we have a new frecat document. It is unnamed, as you can see over here. Okay. So let's start creating our cube. So for this physical three dimensional geometry, we will first need to create a sketch. And the free cad is telling us to create a sketch, as you can see over here under tasks. So we will left click to create a sketch. Okay. So now we have the choice of selecting either one of these three plans. Now, you need to remember that in order to create a sketch. So basically, to create a three dimensional geometry, we need a sketch, and to create a sketch, we require a flat plan, a flat surface on which that sketch is going to be created. So when starting, you will have access to these three plans. X Z, X Y and Y Z. Once you have created a geometry, then you can use any one of the flat surfaces of the geometry to create further sketches. However, in the beginning, you will have to oe any one of these three planes. So this X Z is basically the front plane, XY is the top plane, Y Z is the side plan. Okay. So depending on what you want to create, you will select the plan. Okay? So for example, let's go back to Power Point and let me explain something. For example, let's go back to that gap we needed to create, which was something like this, from the front view. If you select front view, then you will have to create the sketch that looks something like this. Okay. Then you will use revolve feature, which we will use in lecture, don't worry about that to create this three dimensional geometry. If you select the top plan to create your first sketch, then you will need to create a circle, then move it in the upward direction to create a three dimensional geometry. Then it will start looking something like this, this is not helping. I'm sorry. Then it will start to look something like this, then you will create another sketch on this top flat surface to remove material to basically create the shape of a cap. Okay, so there are more than one ways, as I said, to create a CAD model, and whatever approach you are trying to use, the plan is going to be dependent. Your plan selection is going to be dependent on that. Okay? So let's close it and move back to free care. Okay. So in this case, since we are going to be creating a very simple cube, so it doesn't really matter which plan we select. Okay, because the approach is going to be Sam in case of this cube. However, for other more complex models, the plan selection is going to matter a lot depending on your approach. Okay. So let's say I select this X plan, which is basically the top plan. Let me left click on that. Okay, here. Now that plan has been selected and free cat has moved us to sketcher Workbench. So now we are in sketcher Wpenge to create the sketch. For creating this sketch, you have all of these options from this point to over here. Okay. So let me zoom in on that. So this is create a point. So you can use this option to create a single point. Okay. And let's see what is this one. This is polyline, which is basically a continuous line. We have this line feature then we have the arc, circle, rectangle, polygon, slot, and spline. Okay. So from this point to this spline, we have different types of sketch elements. Okay? It can be a line, it can be a circle. It can be a rectangle depending on your need or a polygon or an arc. From this point, from this option over here, okay, not from this option, just this option, this is the dimension too. Okay. So in the previous version of the free cat like 0.18 and 0.21 before 1.0, you basically had to first create a sketch element like rectangle or circle, then use the dimension tool to apply dimensions like six millimeter length, width, radius, whatever, six, seven, eight millimeter or inches, whatever. On that. However, in the newer variant, it is much more simplistic and intuitive. While creating geometry, the sketch sketch element, free cad directly asks us for dimensions right there. However, you can still use these dimension tools if you want to. Okay. From this point onwards, from this option to this option, we have different types of constraints. Constraints are basically conditions you can set on different sketch elements, whether it is a rectangle, line, circle, whatever. Okay? You can basically tell a line to be perfectly vertical or perfectly horizontal by using these constraints or if there are two lines, you can tell one line to be perpendicular to the other. Okay. Let's see what they do. Okay. So let me demonstrate it right here. Let's say I select this line tool. Okay. And it is always a good idea or it is always recommended to continue your sketch from or to tie your sketch to the origin. This point over here is at the origin. Okay. So always it is not a requirement or it is not necessary, but always a better idea to connect your sketch to origin. And the best practice to do it is starting at the origin. So I will left click on this origin over here and start creating a line. E. Okay. So as you can see, we have two dimensions. And when we move this when we move this sketch mouse pointer around, these two numbers are changing. One of these is the length of the line and the other one is the angle. Okay. So currently, as you can see, let me zoom in. As you can see, the length is highlighted. It is under blue color. Okay. And if we start writing any number, it will change its length. Let's say I type 15. Now it says 15. If I still press taxpas Sorry, I can't choose backspace. So you cannot choose backspace. Okay. Let's say I type 15. Okay? Now, let's say you have typed 15, but you don't want this line, simply press the escape key. Okay? Let me zoom out, simply press the escape key and then create the line once again. Okay. So this time, let's say I type 15 because that is the length I want this line to have. Okay? Then after 15, you will press Enter, and then it free cat has now fixed the length of this line to 15 millimeters. Now it is asking you the angle, and that angle is going to be the angle of this line from this horizontal angle from this one. If I move it down over here, now, as you can see, the angle is zero degrees. If we move upward, the value of angle increases, and to this point, it is 90 degrees. Let's say I want to create a line at 30 degrees. I will simply type 30, press enter, and now we have a line let me zoom in. Now we have a line with the length of 15 millimeters and the end at an angle of 30 degrees. Let's say, now I select the line tool once again and create another line. Let's say somewhere over here, starting at this over here. Okay. So let me create something like this. Let me put that dimension to be let's say 30, and just press center and just left lick it over here to create this line. Okay. Oops, let me change it to top view. Here. Okay. So you might accidentally use press the middle mouse button and then move around to rotate your view in sketch. Okay? That is not very helpful. It is always a better idea to be looking directly at the sketch from the top view or the front view, whatever. Okay. Since we are creating the sketch on the top plan, so I will select this button once again to move to top. Okay. So now we have two lines. One has the dimension of 30 millimeter and the other is 15 millimeter. Now, if I want this line to be perfectly perpendicular to this line, we can use constraints. For that, we will have to select this line, press the Control key and then press we will select this line over here in this button, under elements, you can see that you have two lines, one line, which is this line and two lines, which is the second line. So in your sketch, whatever sketch elements you will have are going to be listed over here. Okay. And all of your constraints would be listed over here as well. Now we have these constraints, but we have not directly assigned them ourselves. And that is because while creating the lines, we created these constraints. For example, the first constraint is the 15 millimeter dimension. Which we assigned to this line. The second one is the angle, which is the 30 degree angle, which we assigned to this line or selves. Then we have another constraint, which is the starting point or this point over here for this third second line, then we have the length of the second line and then we have the sp point of the second line as well. Okay. So now we have two lines and we have created these constraints. While creating the lines, we didn't assign them ourselves. However, let's say, still, you want this line to be perfectly perpendicular to this line. Okay? So you will simply select one line, press the Control key, and while holding it, select the second line. Now as you can see over here, both of these lines are highlighted, meaning both of them are selected. Now if I go over here and this one says can strand horizontal vertical, you don't want that, then this one says can strand parallel. If I click on that, it will make both of these lines parallel. Okay so now both of these lines are parallel to one another. And we have a new constraint, constraint six over here as well, we don't want that, let's just delete it. Once again, select this line and select both of these lines. And after parallel over here, we have constraint perpendicular with the heart key of N. Now if I select this constraint, Okay, it is not applying because it is saying it is over constraint, so we cannot make these lines parallel. To do that, to fix this, we'll have to press Control Z to undo. Okay? Do it once again now. Now, let's select this line, then select this line and click on this perpendicular constraint. Now as you can see, once we did that, the angle between these two lines become a changed to 90 degrees. Both of these lines have become perpendicular. So this is how constraints are used. For example, let's say you create a circle, let's say we create a circle, we provided a dimension of 50 millimeter, sorry, 50 millimeters. Okay, here it is. Then we create many more circles like this. And this time we did not assign any dimension. We just simply we just simply left click, create a circle, left click again to release it. Left click to start a circle, left click again, release to complete or circle. Now we have only assigned dimensions to this first circle. We have not assigned them to this circle, this circle or this circle. We can still do that by going to this dimension tool, left click on that. Click on this circle, and now we can insert the dimension for this circle. However, let's say I insert dimension to this circle using this dimension tool. Once again, you left click on this dimension tool. You can expand it to open up other dimension as well. I can stand diameter radius if you want to insert a specific dimension. However, most of the time, you would be just use if you are to use a dimension tool, you would just choose this simple dimension. Okay? So it will automatically look at the sketch element and it will basically automatically suggest which dimension, which parameter you should enter for its dimension. For example, if it is a circle or arc, it is going to be either radius or diameter. If it is a line, it will it will ask you to enter its length. Okay? So let's say we click on this circle. Okay, and left click over here, and now we have this dialog box. Okay. And it says enter its diameter. Let's say we type in 15 millimeter. 15 and press. Okay. Now for this circle, we applied this 40 millimeter diameter while creating the circle. Okay, that is one way and probably the most simplistic way. For this circle, we first created the circle, then use this dimension tool to enter this dimension. Okay? And for these two circles, we have not assigned any dimensions at all. However, let's say you want this circle and all of these three circles to be of equal dimension, 15 millimeters. You want this circle to be 15 as well, and this one to be 15 as well, to be equal to this first circle. For that, simply press the escape key to exit out of the dimension tool. Select this circle, press the Control key or Shift key, both work, then select this circle and then select this circle. Okay, as you can see over here, we have these three circles selected. And if you look under constraints, here, here, we have constraint equal with the hot key of E. If I select it, all three of the circle, the second and third circle change its dimension to this first circle to the one to which we have provided the dimensions ourselves. Let's say this circle and this circle for dimension less and you assign dimension to this circle. Then if you choose this equal constraint, the first and second circle would change their diameter to this third circle. It is basically making all of these circles equal. Now we have told free cat that circle, this circle and this circle are equal and dimension to this circle. Okay, we have applied a constra. Now, let's say, if we double click on this number over here, which we inserted to be 15. Now let's say we make it 20. Let's say we want to change its dimension, change its diameter. We write 20 over here and click Okay. Now, we only changed the dimension of this circle, but dimensions of this circle and this circle has been changed as well because these were equal to this first circle. The constraints were applied. So this is basically how you choose constraints and create sketches. Okay. So now let's move on to creating our cube. For creating our cube, first of all, we will have to delete all of that. Okay? So just you can either left click and create a box and select everything. Or you can press Control A. Control isn't working. Shift A is also not working. So basically just create a box or we have all of the elements over here, select everything over here as well. For that, you'll just have to press the left mouse button. Move it upward. Okay? So here. Now we have selected everything. Press the delete key. Not working once again. What's going on? Okay. So let's use this option. Select everything, press the delete key, and everything is gone. Okay. Okay. So now let's start creating our cube. And for our cube, we basically will have to create a square. Okay. So you can either use the line tool to create four lines or directly use the rectangle tool because that is going to be much more easy. So let's left click to select the rectangle tool. Let's start over here and move it upward. Okay. So we can either left click right now and then insert dimensions by using this dimension to letter, or we can insert them right now. I think right now is the better idea. Let's just do it. For its length, we will type 50. Okay. So you can see, we have 50 typed over here, press Enter. Now it has changed. Now instead of asking for length, it is asking for its width, and that would be 50 ones again. Press Enter. And now we have a square, 50 millimeters of width and 50 millimeter of length. Okay. So this is going to be our sketch, our sketch is ready. We are ready to apply features on it, so we will simply left click on this button over here, close to exit out of this sketcher workbench. Okay. Okay. So once we did that, cad has switched us to part design workbench. And in part design workbench, we can apply features on the sketches we have created in sketcher workbench. Okay. So the feature we are going to be using for this case is going to be pad, which is over here. You can also apply it from over here as well under tasks. So now we have created a sketch. Under tasks, it is showing us all of the different tasks we can apply to this sketch. We can either choose to create a new sketch or apply any one of these features. And pad is going to be the feature which is going to be 90% of the time in your modeling, you are going to be using. It is very, very common. In other softwares in solid words, for example, it is called as extrude, but in free cat, it is pad. Another thing to remember about these features. So as you can see, from this point to this point, you have different features which are in Jallow color and then so you have in red color and then over here you have in Jallow once again. So the features which are in yellow color are basically additive features, meaning according to the definition of the sketch, they're going to add material to your model. Whereas these red ones are subtractive features, meaning they are going to be removing material. Okay. So for this one, we want to add material on the basis of this sketch, so we will use this pad feature, which is over here, P D pad. Okay. Let's left click on that and we have our padding. So once you selected the pad feature, under tasks, this button, these options will pop up pad parameters. Okay. So here you will specify the parameters and basically the settings of this pad feature. The first thing is type. Under type you will select how you want to assign this pad features. You can either do it pad dimension, entering the dimension, up to in the third axis, which is the Z axis, which you can see over here. So we created a sketch on XY plan. Now we are using the pad feature to pull it upward in along z axis. Okay? So the dimension to which we want to pull it upward to create a three dimensional geometry. Or you have other options as well. If you expand this, you have to last to first, up to pace and two dimension up to shape, et cetera. Okay? So two dimension is basically going to be two dimensions like upward and downward. Let's say you want to, let's just express it right now over here. Okay. Let's say we type 20 on the upwards length one. Okay. After typing 20, don't press the enter key because it will close you out of the pad feature, simply left click somewhere over here in this box. I will left click over here. It updates the view. Now it is 20 millimeters in the upward direction from the sketch we created and ten millimeter in the downward direction. If we change it to let's say 50 in the downward direction, now it increases its length in the downward direction. Okay. So this is basically two dimension, or you can just choose one dimension to only pad it in the upward direction. Okay? Or you can change its direction as well if you check this reverse button. Okay? If you check this reverse, it changes its direction to other side. If you uncheck, it changes its direction to upward. Okay? So apart from dimensions, you have these options as well up to phase to first to last and up to chef. These are not relevant right now. Basically, it is up to phase Rubis select up to pas, in the case that there is another phase directly in the way of this sketch that you have created, and it will basically pad this sketch up to that specific phase. Okay. And up to shape is padding it up to a different shape, okay, whether it is planar phase or circular or spherical, whatever, or cylindrical, whatever. Okay. So for this one, we're going to stick to dimension, and dimension is going to be 50 millimeters because we are creating a cube. Okay. Left click to update the view, and you have other options as well. Who check this symmetric to plan, and this will basically put your sketch right in the middle and we selected the lent to be 50. This would mean it is 25 millimeter in the upward direction, 25 millimeter in the downward direction. Okay. We don't want that, so I will uncheck it once again. Okay. So you have some other options here as well, far directions, sketch normal, sketch reference, custom direction. This is basically the direction of padding basically. Most of the time, it is going to be sketch normal, meaning pad this add material in the z axis directly normal to the sketch. Okay? You can check this to also show the direction. Okay, it is zero, zero, one, moving in the upward direction. Okay. You can also change it, but we're not going to do that for this video, because we don't need to do it to create a cube. Basically, this just means that you don't need to concern yourself with every single button in a free care. So you need to focus on your task, what you're trying to create and basically use or try to understand all of the features you need to create that specific shape or specific model. Right now we are creating a cube, so sketch normal words for us for that case, we do not need to concern ourselves with other options. Okay. So obviously, it is going to be 50 because that is the length of this line, the dimensions of length and width of the rectangle that we created. Okay. I'm getting a bit story. Okay. I apologize for that. Let's click. Okay, and now we have our model. Okay. Now our cube is basically ready. You can just close it right now. But let's say we want to round off these edges, or we want to round these edges basically to eliminate these sharp edges. For that, we have a tool called fill, and it is this one. Okay, fill it. Left click on that to select. Now we are in selection mode. Okay? So we'll basically have to select everything we want to apply Fillet on. So currently it is displaying an error fill, Fillet not possible on selected shares. We have not selected anything, so just ignore that. Okay. So these kind of random error messages which don't usually make sense, do appear in free kid. Okay. So let's say we want to round off this edge. Let's say we select this edge and under this checkbox, this edge seven has been listed. Now, if you want to preview how this will look, you can select this button to preview, and as you can see over here, it is showing us the rounded edge. If you want to select more edges, you will click on this Select button. Let's select this edge, this edge, and this edge. Because these are the four edges on which we want to apply this fillet feature or this rounding feature. You can either select these four edges, however, there is a much more easier way to do it. Let's select all of these edges, press the delete key. And instead of selecting these specific edges, let's select this phase. So when we select this phase, it will automatically apply the feature to all of the edges of this phase. So this phase has four edges, one, two, three, four. Okay. So selecting for edges is difficult as compared to selecting a single phase. So we will select phase. Okay. Then we will rotate around and select this phase. Okay, rotate it upward once again, or just click on this button over here and go to isometric view pen to move this move this model downward. Okay? Now click on this preview button over here and it is applying or rounding off to all of the edges. And over here under radius, we can select the magnitude of this rounding. Currently, it is set to 1 millimeter. This is basically the radius of the circle to which these edges are going to be cut off or rounded off. So currently it is 1 millimeter. We can increase to a large number, but that looks something weird. So let's double click on that and type one, and then once again, left click somewhere over here to update the view. Okay. So if you want to apply this effect on all of the edges like this one as well, instead of selecting everything, just simply click use all edges. If we don't want to do that, we will only select these phases and we have applied or fill it of 1 millimeter radius, and now we simply need to click Okay. Okay. Now we have our cube with rounded top corners and bottom corners ready. So this is everything for this. Lecture. But let's move on to learning how to save our documents. Let's say you want to save this document. For saving, you can either press Control S, and you can save your document like this or you can go to file let me zoom in, File and click Save or Save. Let's click on saves. We will select the location. Let's say I want to save it on desktop. You will type the name over here. Let's say simple Q. Okay. Oops, Caps lock was on. Simple cube. Okay. And it will save it as a free document with the extension of FC SDD. Okay? You can select it is going to be free gad, standard document. Okay, click on Save, move to desktop, and let's see it does not appear over here. Let's move to desktop, and here it is simple cube. Okay. Now, let's say, now this this file will only open in free kit because it is a free kat document. Now, let's say you want to export this to other software like let's say you want to render it in Bland or use it for some kind of analysis in NCIS or Comsole, et cetera. Okay? For that, you will have to export this model, or you want to export it for three D printing, let's say, Okay? For that, you will have to go to file and click on Export. Okay. So first of all, we will have to select an object. So let's select this object or let's go to model and we have this body over here. Left click on this model, this body, which is basically this cube, or you can simply click on this cube as well. Let's click on this body, go to file and click on Explore. Okay. Now you can export it in different formats. There is TMF, which is used for manufacturing, which is basically three D printing. Additive manufacturing format, MF, but most of the time the STL mesh is used for three D printing. Okay? So it would be this one dot STL. Okay. If I select, save it as STL, click Save. And now we have an STL file over here, simple cube body STL, which can be used for three D printing. Okay. And you can also export it in other formats as well. Like you have a lot of options over here, IGS o or CA OpenScadFmat, you can use export it in step format which is used in solid works a lot and many other options as well. AtoDsk DW D, DXF, and many more. Okay? Here we have x3d as well, which can be used which is sported in Blender as well. Okay. So you can export your model by choosing these options. Okay. So this was all for this lecture. And the next lecture, we'll be creating a Lego block. Thank you. 7. Day 2: Part Modelling - Lego Block: So in this video, we are going to be creating a lego block or lego brick, whatever you want to call it. Okay, so this is going to be the second day or a four course, which is basically going to mean it is going to be the second project. Okay. So you're going to learn a lot of new things in this while creating this model as well. Okay? So first of all, let's look at its dimensions or before dimension, let's just actually look at this lego block. This lego block will have three bumps and on its back side, it is also going to have some three holes into which those bumps will go. Okay, to attach different lego bricks on top of this spray. Okay. And it is going to have this fillet over here on these edges as well. Okay. So let's do it. I will just close this and we'll create a new parametric part because this is once again going to be a parametric model. Okay? So let me just turn on magnifier and here we are. Okay. So I will create parametric part. Let's do that. And next thing you know we need to do is to start creating a sketch. So we will go to tasks over here and click on this Create sketch. And then we will have to select the plan. However, whenever you are starting a new CAD model, there are two things you need to make sure of. Okay? First, you need to look at the dimensions or the drawing of the parts you are trying to create. And basically, think of the approach you're going to carry out. Just think of it in your mind. Okay? So plan your approach. For example, this is going to be a ego Black as we have seen as created in the in free cat. Okay, momentarily, you saw the model. So we are going to plan or approach. Okay? So the common sense here is that first, we will create this best rectangle, then pad it upwards and then create these bumps and then on the bottom side, we will create two holes. Okay. So now we know the dimensions, now we can plan approach. And for this approach, we need to select a specific plan and we will select X Y plan. Okay. So lets click on there. So the first thing before creating every card model is to think of your approach and have the dimensions of the parts are rough dimensions like over here on piece of paper or some drying on in computer. Okay, at least have some idea of dimensions. Do not make model with arbitratory dimensions because it is going to mess up your model. Okay? And the second thing is to make sure you are in the correct measurement system. Okay? For that, as we know, we have our dimensions in millimeters, 32 millimeters, 16 millimeter seven, 9.6. All of our dimensions are in millimeters, you need to make sure that in your system of measurement in fread or any other CAD modeling software. The unit for length is millimeters. And we can do that by going back to free cad and going over here. Okay, let me zoom here, this bottom right hand side of screen. Here it says 182.69 in 200 millimeter. It is millimeter, meaning the unit for length is millimeter. These numbers are basically the dimensions of the screen. So you can zoom in, zoom out. These numbers change. So let's make sure these are a millimeter. Left click on that, standard unit of length is millimeter as we can see. That is perfectly fine. Okay. Now let's start creating our model. So first of all, we are going to create this rectangle. Okay, its length is 32 millimeter and width is 16 millimeter. Okay. So let's go to fricatG over top to this toolbar and select rectangle. It is over here. Left click on there. And as you know, it is always a good idea or it is recommended to tie your sketches to the origin in one way or another. Okay. So we will start or rectangle from the center. Okay? So it is at the center, left click, and then drag your mouse around. Okay. So length was 32 millimeter, I will type 32 and press Enter and width was 16 millimeter. Let's type 16, press Enter. Let's zoom out a bit. So here is our rectangle. Okay. So our best sketch is ready. Okay, we need to extrude it upward or pad it upward into z axis in up to 9.6 millimeters. Okay? So let's click on this close button over here. Left click on close. Then we need to pad this sketch in the Z direction. Okay. So you can directly click on pad under tasks over here as well, or you can use this paired button over here, this one. Okay. And I will do it. Left click. Now we can pad it in Z axis. Okay. And you can see the XYZ axis over here, here, okay, the bottom left hand side of the screen. Okay. So in dimension, we are going to do it by dimension. So it is going to be double click on that, type 9.6, and then left click somewhere over here. Don't press Enter because it will just apply the pad parameters we are writing over here and we'll exit out of the pad tool. Okay? So left click over here somewhere in this blue box. Okay? So now it is showing us the preview, L's click on Okay. And now we have our brick or block. Okay. So after this, we need to create bumps. Okay, and bumps are going to be on top of this flat surface. So when starting your CAD model, first of all, you will have to select a plan from those XY ZX Z plans that are given at the beginning of each Ed modeling project. However, right now, you have other flat surfaces as well. You can still access those plans as well by going to model. And if you expand this over here, let me zoom in, expand this origin, clicking on this box. And here you have all of those plans XY Ys and Zadx. You can still select them. If I left click on that. Now this XY plan is selected, and you can still go to task and then click on Create Sketch to create sketches on those plans. However, on top of that, you now has these flat surfaces of this brick as well. And you can create sketches on these flat surfaces as well. The condition for creating a sketch on a surface is that it needs to be flat. It doesn't matter it is at a certain angle or not. You can create a sketch on any surface as long as it is flat. So bumps are going to be over here, so I will left click to select the surface. Now it is selected because it has turned blue, it has changed its color. Now we can go over here to tasks and click on Create sketch. Let's do that. Now the view changes to the one directly facing the face we selected, which is basically the top view. Okay, as you can see it over here on this cube. So now let's create our sketch. And for this sketch, let's see what we need. We need two circles. Okay, so these circles with radius diameter of 7 millimeters. Okay. And these sketches have to be equal distance from this line to this line. Okay. So now we need to place them equally from this side to this side. So basically, we need to do some calculations in our mind. So basically, this entire length is 32 millimeters. Okay? Let me select the pen. Okay, so this is 32 millimeters. Okay. So we need to find the distance from this line to the center of these circles. This kind of calculations you will often have to carry out while creating a card model. Okay. So that means that if we divide this into half, like this, this is going to be 16 millimeters, and this is going to be 16 millimeters as well. Okay. So this circle needs to be at the exact center of this half rectangle. Okay, this is basically square. Okay. So basically, if the point this to the midpoint or the mid line of this rectangle is 16 millimeter. So for this distance and this distance to be equal, it needs to be 16/2, that is 8 millimeters, and 8 millimeters over here. Meaning the center of this circle should be 8 millimeters away from this line. Okay. Similarly, the center of this circle should be 8 millimeters away from this line over here. Okay. So now we have figured out the horizontal distances. I've typed a writ in 18, it is eight. Okay. For vertical distance, the total is 16, so both of these should be 8 millimeters away similarly from this top line or this bottom line. So this distance should also be 8 millimeters. These are the dimensions for or the distances from these lines for our circles. Now let's go back to freak. First of all, let's just create two circles without any arbitrary dimension, or we can provide the dimension without any specific position. Okay? So let's select this circle tool. It is over here. Create circle by center. Okay, let's left click on that and I will create one circle somewhere over here. Its diameter needs to be, let me see. Seven centimeter. I will type seven press Enter. Now we have a circle of seven centimeter diameter. Let's create another circle over here, and we can either enter the dimension for this one as well, but it is a better practice to create this circle and then make the circle equal to the other circle. So we have not yet assigned dimensions to this circle. I will press the escape key, select both of these circles, and you can basically select them by just clicking on this one, left click. As you can see over here, this circle has been selected. Then we can click on this circle to select that as well. You don't need to press Control or Shift key, which I said that you need to do it in the previous. You don't actually need to do it. You had to press those keys in the previous version of free kit. Now you don't need. So you can simply just left click selected, left click selected. Both of these circles have been selected. Now, this one has the dimension provided to it of 7 millimeters and this one has no dimensions. So now both of these are selected, I will go to the stop to this constraints menu from this point to this point constraints, and I will use the equal constraint. Okay. Let's make them equal. So now the equal constraint has been used, and whatever the dimension, a one circle is going to be the second circle will change its dimension accordingly. Okay. So now we have the circles, but we need to position them at our appropriate positions at millimeters from this line and at millimeter from this line. Okay. So basically, that means we need to insert dimensions between this point, the center of these circles, and this line of our rectangle. But there is a problem. The problem here is that we did not create this line or this line or this line in this sketch. It was created in a previous sketch, which was then extruded or moved into third dimension into Z axis using the PAD feature. So these lines do not exist in this rectangle does not exist in the current sketch we are creating. In current sketch, there are only these two circles. Okay. Now, even if we still try to select the dimension tool, which is over here, let's select that. Okay. If you click on, let's say, the center of this circle and then we try to create dimension between this center assigned distance between the center of the circle and this line, we can't do that. We cannot select this sent circle. Okay? You are seeing vertical dimension, but that is not to this line of this rectangle. It is to this axis, this red line, which is the X axis. Okay? We cannot assign dimensions or use these lines of this rectangle as a reference. That is a problem because we need to provide dimensions to these lines. We need to assign the position of the center of these circles according to these lines. In free cat, there is a tool to basically do that. Okay. So if you go to the tap over here, here it is a tool. Okay, let me zoom in this one. It says, create external geometry, and it says, create an edge linked to an external geometry. So let's left click on that. So it is selected. Let's zoom out. Okay. So to figure out that whether you have selected to specific tool or not, you will see here as you can see. Next to the cursor, we have the icon for that specific tool. Okay. So if there is an icon, that means you have selected a specific tool. Okay. So using this tool, we can extract lines or edges or even points from a previously created sketch to be used as references for our new sketch. Okay? So now this tool has been selected this tool over here, ret external geometries. We can left click on this line. Now, as you can see, we can select that line. Okay, we can click on that line. So let's left click on that line. It has been created or converted into a reference geometry. Okay. Let's do that for this line, top line, and for this line as well. Okay, here. So now over here under the elements for this sketch, first of all, you have two circles, which we have ourselves created. But then you have these three extracted lines or reference lines from previously created sketch as well. Okay. And as you can see, these have different colors. These has a purple color to it. This purple color basically denotes that or it represents that it is a reference sketch. It is not the actual sketch or the equal sketch elements of this sketch. For example, if I select a line tool and let's say I create a line somewhere over here like this. Now this line is, let me select it. It is this line. It does not have the purple color. Okay? It does have purple color to the points, but the line is not in purple color. So that means that this line, it is not this line, it is not a reference line, whereas these lines have purple color, meaning they are reference lines. So let me just select this line and delete it because we don't need it. Okay. Now we can use the dimension tool and reference assigned dimensions to these lines because we have created external geometries over here. So first of all, let's select the dimension tool. Okay. Let's click on the center of this circle, and let's click on this top line. Let's select the stop line. Click over here, left click, and then you can assign the value. So overall is 16, half of it would be at that would position the center directly at the center, or in the middle of this width. Okay. Eight millimeter, press Okay. Then once again, left click select, then this line, move it over here, type 8 millimeters, press Okay. Okay. So now to position these centers, these two circles at their appropriate position, you can do two things. You can either assign the distance between this center and this line. Which is 8 millimeters. Or what you can do. Let me go back. You can also do it by assigning the distance between these two centers of these two circles. So once again, if this is from here to here at centimeter, from here to here at centimeter as well, total is 32, so at plus at 16, meaning the distance between these two hoops, that can happen sometime. Meaning the distance between center to center is 16 millimeters. Okay, eight plus 16, 28 plus 60, 24, yes. And 24 plus eight, once again, equals 32. Okay. So we can assign dimensions from this center to this line over here as well as this center to this line over here. Or we can assign the distance between these two centers. Okay? So let's do that. Okay. Let's select this point. Let's select this point, and we can assign the distance. Let's make it 16 press. Okay. Okay. Now we have assigned the distance, but there is still a problem because as you can see, the distance from this line to this line or this line to this point to this line and this center to this line is not equal, which you can evidently see. We will have to assign distance either over here or over here. Let's do it over. Let's select this center. Let's select this line and write at millimeters. So from this line to this millimeter then from this center to this center, 16 millimeter, which basically ensures that the distance between this circle, this center and this line is eight millimeter as well as we can see it. So we don't need to assign it because if we assign too many dimensions which are not actually required, we don't need to assign dimension over here, so it will make the sketch overdfined and it is not a good idea to overdefine your sketch. Only provide dimensions where you need it, okay? So even if you don't assign dimension over here between this send to this line, the distance is going to be at millimeters. Okay. So now, everything is ready. So this basically meant that we did not actually needed to create a reference line over here, but we have, so let's just move on. Okay. And as you can see over here, it says redundant constraints, meaning there are constraints in this sketch which are not actually needed. Okay? So let's click on that. There are seven. Okay. So when you click on that, it basically resolves all of the redundant constraints, and now there are no strands. Okay. So if you see redundant constraints over here, it means that there are constraints constraints applied in the sketch which are not needed. When you click on that, it basically automatically resolves all of that. Okay. So now our sketch is ready. Let's click on close. We have our two circles over here, placed at their perfect required position. Now we can once again go back over here and click on pad. Okay. So as you can see, we can create bumps. Let's go back and see the bumps height is three millimeter. Okay. So let's go back. Type three over here, left click somewhere over here to basically update the preview, and you need to turn on this update view over here. This button needs to be take part to actually see the preview over here. Okay. So this is perfectly fine. That is what we need. Click Okay. Okay. So now we have our bumps and we basically the next thing we need to do to rotate and create holes over here for these two bumps. Okay. So let's do it. Let's select this bottom surface. Go over here under task, select, create sketch. Okay? So let's create our sketch. Okay. So once again, for these holes, we need the same positions as for those bumps. Okay. And we can once again copy the same methodology we followed over there as well, but we are going to do things differently over here. Okay. So let's say let's first of all, create reference lines. Okay? So once again, select this create external geometry. We will select this line and this line as well as this line. Okay. Now, instead of creating two circles and then whatever we did for creating those pumps, we're going to do things differently over here. Okay. What we're going to do, we're going to select the line tool. Okay. And we're going to create a line directly from the center of this line to the center of this line. Basically a line cutting this rectangle right at the center of the fifth. Okay? So now we want to find the center of this line. Okay? So we want a line originating at the center or midpoint of this line. Okay. And this is basically very easy in free care. Okay? For example, this entire line is, as you know, 16 millimeters. So for example, if you start, you can see zero millimeter, zero millimeter. It is basically the distance from the origins both in X axis and Y axis. Okay? If you move, start to move along the X axis, as you can see, the number for X xs increases let me zoom in. Okay. Now it is 9.82 whereas the other number remains the same. Okay? Similarly, if you go downward, since we are going in the downward direction, so it is going to be negative Y axis. So the number or the distance from the origin along Y axis increases, but in the opposite direction, and therefore, it has a minus sign to it. Okay. So as you can see, when we go downward, it is decreasing. If you go in this direction or in this direction, both of those numbers change because we are moving in both axes. Now. Since we know, as you can see, here it is zero, and here it is -16 millimeters. Meaning the length of this line is 16 millimeter. Center is somewhere at not somewhere it is directly at eight millimeter. Okay. Can find that very easily. If you hover, one more thing as you can see when I move hover over here, or cursor only has the symbol of the line tool, meaning the line tool has been selected. However, if I move this line over to this reference or external geometry reference line we created. Now there is that line tool, but there is also another symbol next to it. This basically means that you are going to create a line, but that line will fall or will originate on an already created sketch element. Okay. So that means if we start to a line over here, it will originate from this previously created reference line. Okay. So this symbol, basically, it helps to know whether we have selected a specific line segment or not, o, or whether we are on top of line segment or not. Okay. So we need to find eight millimeter because that is where we want to originate or line. Okay? So let's keep moving downward, 5.6 now six, it is seven. And as you can see, now it is -7.14, and if I go a little bit downward, it directly snaps itself or moves itself to the center which is at eight millimeter. Okay? And if I go downward, I'm still moving, but the dimension it is showing that it is still eight millimeter meaning, the cursor has been snapped to the center or the midpoint of this line. Okay? If I move away and after a long time, then it actually continues to go downward. Okay. So finding centers or midpoints of lines or circles or whatever is very easy. Your cursor will automatically snap itself to that midpoint. So this is the midpoint, left click, and then we can create a line. Okay. So obviously, the length is going to be 16 up to here, sorry, 32, up to this Okay, and the angle needs to be zero. For the angle, one more thing. As you can see, if we go, for example, over here, if you go upward, the angle is increasing, but it is increasing very gradually, 20.33 degrees, 22, 23, 24, 25. However, if we press the Control key, and keep the control key pressed while holding the control key. Now if you move around, as you can see, it is moving at specific steps, five degrees, ten degrees, 15 degrees, 20, 25, 30, 35. Okay. So if you want to move or directly, let's say, you want to create an angle, create a line at an angle of 30 degrees. Okay? So you can either create just directly enter the dimension and enter the 30 degree number over here by pressing entering the dimension or if you don't want to press Interdimension, simply press the tape key, and now we have not assigned the length, but we can directly assign the angle. Okay. You can either just type here 30 degrees and press Enter. Okay? Or you can press the Control key and move to 30 degrees. Okay. So just to remember that while pressing the Control key, your angle will snap to every new angle at the gap of five degrees basically. Okay. We wanted to create fix it at zero, so I will once again, press the Control key because if I don't press the Control key and try to move around, it is very difficult for me to find the zero degrees. Okay. So you can type, but when you are creating models and you become very proefficient, typing takes a lot of time, basically. Not a lot of time, but more time than just simply pressing the Control key, moving down. Now it is at zero and then moving in the other direction up to this point. Okay, here, here. Here. Okay. So we have directly created a line up to this point, this line. And we can tie this line or end this line at the midpoint of this line over here because we have created this external geometry over here as well. Okay. So here is our line. Next, what we can do, we can create circles now. Okay. So our circle, obviously, this line is at the midpoint of this line and this line. So basically, if you create any circle, it is going to be that circle is going circle with its center on this line. That circle will be right in the middle of this width, basically. So let's create a circle over here and another circle over here. Okay. Then we will select the dimension tool. We could have done it while creating the circle as well. But let's just select this dimension tool, select one circle and type eight millimeter 7 millimeters. So the bumps are 7 millimeters, so the holes need to be a little bit larger hole to be a little bit larger diameter than the bumps, let's say 7.15. Okay. So we have 0.15 tolerance. Let's click Okay. Then press scale to exit out of the dimension tool, select this circle, select this circle, and make them equal. Okay. So now both of these circles are equal. Next, we need to assign. Once again, we can assign distance, and once again, we can do the same thing we did while creating pumps. Let's set the dimension tool, select this center, and then select this center. Okay? This distance was 16 millimeters. Okay. Then we can either assign this center to this line distance or this center to this line distance. Let's do it over here. Select this center, this line. Okay. This needs to be 8 millimeters type eight, press Okay. Now, everything is perfectly fine. Now, actually, we don't need this line. We only created this line for these circles to be perfectly at the midpoint or the middle of this rectangle elongates width. This line does not need to be included in design of our holes. Okay. So we'll simply left click on this line to select, press the delete key, it is gone. Okay. So while creating CAD models, you will often draw lines and other sketch elements only for the reference. Okay? And then you will basically have to delete them afterwards. So now, press close. Okay. So it is giving us an error. Let's just ignore that. Free cad often does that because it is open source and free software. So it does not function as well as I functions really well, but it does not function as good as a traditional full on card package like solid words, creo et cetera. Okay. So we have these lines, and we need to create holes choosing this sketch, okay? So basically, we need to remove material. Okay. And basically, what this means that we need to remove material in a fashion that is opposite to this pad feature. Okay? And the opposite of this pad feature is this over here, pocket. Okay. So in the previous lecture, as I mentioned, that these tools or these features yellow color or additive, meaning the add material and the ones in red color, they remove material. We need to use this pocket feature to remove material according to this sketch. Let's left click on that. Everything else here is just the same as what was that pad feature. So these bumps, the height of these bumps was three millimeter, and as we know, the whole depth is 3.5 millimeter. So we will simply type 3.5 over here for the length of these holes, click over here and the holes have been created, press Okay. Okay. Now our cube sorry, not cube. Lego block or ego break is basically ready. We need to just simply fill it out these edges. If you don't want to, you can choose not to do that, but let's just do it. Let's select this fillet tool, and now we cannot select these direct phases. If I select phase over here like we did for the cube and go to preview, as you can see, it fillets all of these edges, which we do not need. Okay? So I will delete this phase over here, and instead of that entire phase, I will select this then this edge, and you don't need to press any controller Shift can just simply click on the edges. And as you can see over here, under the filled parameters, those edges are being listed. Rotate around, select this edge, and then this edge. Then for radius, let's just keep it at 1 millimeter because that is perfectly fine and suitable for our model. Click on this preview button, and we can see the preview of our fillet. Okay. Let's click Okay, because that is perfectly fine and our Lego block is ready. Okay. So now we can click on this button and go to Isometric View and here it is our Lego block. We basically learned about creating sketches, adding dimensions, and creating holes as well in this lecture. Okay. So this was all for this lecture. Thank you. And in the next lecture, we will be creating a spinning top using revolve feature. Thank you. 8. Day 3: Part Modelling - Spinning Top: So in this video, we are going to be creating this spinning top. And it is going to be we're going to be using a new feature called the revolve feature or the Revolution tool. Revolve or revolution basically the same thing. Okay. So this is going to be the spinning top, you're going to be modeling. Okay. So let's close it. Okay. Let's create a new parametric part, go to tasks and we need to create a sketch. Let's create a sketch. Now we have to select a plan. For Muins system we are still going to stay in millimeters. And for sketch plan, as you know, we need to plan our approach, and for planning our approach, we need to go over the dimensions. Okay. So let's go. So this is basically going to be the spinning top we are going to be modeling. Okay? This nurling part over here, it will not be carried out. However, our shape is going to be just like this. Okay. So obviously, as you can see, the height of the top is 35 millimeter. This distance is 34.3 millimeter, and we have this gap over here of 3 millimeters. Okay. So since we are going to be creating this using revolve feature or revolve revolution tool, and that is the most intuitive and the easiest way to create it. We cannot choose it by using padding, et cetera. Okay? So for example, if we try to create it by creating a sketch over here, then padding it upward and then trying to create this kind of shape and then creating another circle over here and then padding it upward to this point and then up to this point and so on and so forth, that is going to be extremely difficult. Okay? So instead of that, what we're going to do, we will use revolution feature, and for that, we will only have to create the half sketch. Okay? Instead of creating this entire sketch from the bottom up or the top down, we will create this sketch. This line, this profile, this line over here, small line of 3 millimeters, then this profile and then this top line over here. Okay. And half of it is going to be looking something like this. Okay? This top surface has the diameter of 5.1 millimeter, so it is going to be 2.5 millimeter, 2.55 millimeter, which is half of that. This line will be the same as 35 millimeter. Then the distance the overall diameter from this point to this point of the spinning top is 34.3. So half of that would be 17.15 millimeters. Okay. In addition to that, we need vertical distance from the top surface this point over here, okay? And that is, it is not provided in this picture, which I obviously found it on the Internet, but it is roughly at about 20 millimeters. Okay? So we will create this sketch, okay? And then we will revolve it around 360 degrees to create our spinning top. Okay. So revolution is basically very similar to padding instead of moving your model and moving your sketch in the third axis, which could be XY or Z anyone and adding more layers to create a three dimensional geometry, we are going to be adding more layers or moving or two dimensional sketch around an angle. Okay. And that is going to be 360 degrees to do a complete rotation, which will basically create this spinning top. So let's go to freaked and start creating that. So for this one, since we are not going to be doing the bottoms up approach going from this thing and this the moving upward, for that, we would have to select the top plan, which is X Y plan. This time we're going to be creating this sketch. Okay? And this sketch is visible. If you look at the model, this sketch is going to be visible at or this surface or this side of this spinning top is going to be visible at from the front view. Okay? So basically, it means that we will need to select the front plan, which is X Y plan. Okay? So we will select that and now we can create start creating our sketch. Let me move around. Okay. So first of all, we will create this vertical line or this vertical line with the length of 35 millimeters. So let's do it. I will select the line tool and click on this origin, move it upward, and since it is going to be 35, so let's type 35 Enter, angle should be 90, type 90, Enter, and we have our line. Okay. Next, we need to draw this curved surface from this point to this point. Okay. So before that, let's draw this line, this line over here, off 2.5 millimeters. So let's do that. Okay. So once again, select the line tool. It is going to be over here and let's create this line. It would be how much it would be, it would be 2.55 millimeters as you can see. So let's type 2.55 Enter and since it is going to be perfectly horizontal line, so angle would be zero degrees, zero enter. Okay. Now, we need to draw this curved surface. Okay? So this curved surface, if you can look over here or over here, it will basically begin over here at this point, which is basically this line and it will end over here, at this line. Okay? This line is 17.15 millimeters away from the center and 20 millimeters away from the top surface. Okay. So first, let's create this line from this point to this point with the length of 17.15 millimeters. Okay. So once again, let's select the line tool. Let's create a line roughly somewhere over here. It's length is going to be 17 point. What was it? Five, 17.15, half of 34.3 millimeters. 17.15 angle would be zero degree because it is going to be once again perfectly horizontal line. Okay, now. Now, this point is 17.15 millimeters away from this central line. Okay. But we also need to assign the vertical distance. So I will go to dimension tool, which is this one, left click on there to select it, then select this line, then select this line. We can assign the dimension. Let's type 20, press. Okay. Okay. So now we need to draw this curved surface beginning at this point or this curve beginning at this point and ending at this point. Okay? For that, we have a specific tool in free cat, and that is over here called B spline curve or spline basically the same thing. So using this, we can create curves and we can then dictate its profile by osing something called control points. Okay. So for example, now I have this slant tool selected, as you can see from the icon. Let's say I start a curve somewhere over here. Let's say I start it over here. So this initial point, as you can see it as a circle around it, it is going to be first control point. Then let's say I create another control point over here. Then as you can see, we are beginning to create a curve. Let's say third control point over here and then over here. Okay. So once we've created all the control points and we are finished, press the escape key to complete our curve or spline. Then press the scape key once again to exit out of the B spline tool. Now we have this curved surface or curved sketch element. We can control the profile of this curve by using these control points or they are sometimes also called as curve handles, okay? For example, if I left click to select it, as you can see, now a hand symbol appears. Now if we move in this direction and in this direction, we can change the or even up and down, we can change the profile of this curve. Like this, I can move around these and I can also move around these as well. They are tied to a certain any other sketch element, then you won't be able to move the ends. Okay. So this is how curves or splines are created in frega and we are going to do just that over here as well. Okay? So let's select it and presally. Okay. Once again, let's create our spline over here or curve over here. So select B spline tool. So our curve, obviously, it will begin over here and end over here. Or in this figure, begin over here. End over here. Okay. So meaning it will begin over here and end over here. So let's begin over here, okay. Left click. Move downward, and we will insert a curve handle somewhere over here. Okay? Because if you look at this figure, its direction begins to change somewhere over here. So you need to put the curve handle or control points at the point where the direction of the curve begins to change. Okay. So initially, it is going in downward direction, and then from this point, it seems to go in the horizontal direction. Okay. So I will create it somewhere over let's say somewhere over here. We can still move it around in later as well. Okay, let's create it over here and then the sketch over here. Okay? So now our sketch is ready. We don't need to create any other curve handles. Let's press the scalp and press the scalp once again to exit out of this sketch two. Now, since these are going to be starting at end positions, we are not going to move those curve handles instead of we will use this one to change to control the profile of this curve. I will just move something like this, like that is perfectly perfect. Okay. Let's move it upward a bit. Okay. Like this. Okay. You can also assign certain distances or dimense to these curve handles as well. For example, if I let's want this curve handle to be let's say like this, these two curve handles at a specific distance, I can do that as well. Okay. Okay. Next, we're going to create a line over here, and it is going to be this line. Vertical line with the length of 3 millimeters. So let's do that. Select the line tool, click over here. Perfectly downward. Distance would be length should be three millimeter and angle would be 90 but in downward direction. So it would be minus nine. Okay? If you write 90, it will draw three millimeter line in the upward direction. So it should be -90 us enter via line. Okay. Here. Let's move down a bit. Okay. So we have this line over here as well. Then once again, we have another curved surface. Okay. Now, if we create a curve over here from this line, this point to this point, then there is going to be a problem. So for example, if I create a curve from this point to this point, Okay. Now our curve has been created. Okay, let's hear. This curve has been created, but the bottom point of this spinning top on top of which it is going to spin, it is a sharp pointy end. Okay? And in reality, if you look at even over here, it is not perfectly pointing. Okay? So for that, we are going to delete this curve, and we will create one more line. Okay. And this is going to be a very small horizontal line over here. Let's create it over here and its length should be like 1.5 millimeter, nothing more than that. And since it is going to be perfectly horizontal, so angle would be zero degrees type zero precenter. Now we can create our spline and it'll begin over here and end over here. Once again, left over here to start, insert a curve handle or control point somewhere in the middle. Let's say somewhere over here and then join it to this point. Okay. So we have created three points, starting point, midpoint, which is going to be the curve handle, we are going to use to control its profile, and then the endpoint. Simply press escape. Press scare once again to exit out of the spline tool, and then use this to control the profile of this curve. I will simply move it upward a bit more, a bit more, and that is perfect. Okay. Now our sketch is ready. Now we are basically going to use the Revolution tool to revolve this around in 60 degrees to create a three dimensional geometry of a spinning. Okay. So our sketch is ready. Let's click Close. Okay, so here it is. Now, sketch is ready, but we have missed one thing. We don't actually need this line. Okay? So we can just select it over here, press delete. But if you do that, the entire sketch gets removed. So press Control Z to return it again. Okay, go to model body, and here we have this sketch. Right click, click on Added sketch. Now under added sketch, we select this line. It is selected, as you can see over here, three line, press delete. Now it has been deleted. Press close, and here it is our profile. Now, we simply need to click on the Revolution tool. Revolution tool is right next to pad tool. This is the pad tool, this is the Revolution tool. And if I do it, let's just left lick to select it and you can directly see it has created the geometry of our spinning to. However, let's look at what options this revolution tool provides us, what parameter it provides. So first of all, we have type, and this type is basically similar by dimension or up to some other phase. In this case, there are no other pairs and there are no first and last. You also have two dimensions just like you had for the pad feature as well. Okay? So let's just keep it on dimension. Okay. Next is axis. And it is basically the axis around which it is rotating. Okay. So our sketch looks something like this. It was the mirror image of that, but uh, let's not focus on that. Okay. So this is the vertical axis. Okay, this vertical line of 35 millimeter. Whereas this one is this line of 2.5 millimeter is the horizontal axis or the 1.5 millimeter line over here at the bottom is also horizontal axis of our sketch. Okay? So we can basically choose around which sketch axis, vertical or horizontal, we choose to do this revolution to use this revolution feature. So it is currently on vertical sketch axis. So it is taking this line, this line, and it is revolving Oops. It is revolving this sketch around that vertical axis sketch axis. Okay. Let's say if we change it to if you click on that, here it is horizontal sketch axis, let's do that. Now it is revolving the entire sketch around horizontal sketch axis, which is this one. So it is moving it in the upward direction then revolving it around that sketch axis. Horizontal sketch axis. And by that, we get this type of shape. So we don't want that. You can also select the Bs x and y axis and Z axis as well. So if you select best X axis, that is the same as horizontal sketch axis because this line that we created over here was directly on top of horizontal axis. Okay? So it is the same thing. Similarly, we select best Y axis, then once again, it is revolving it around bass axis. So we want to revolve it around vertical sketch axis. Okay? So let's select that vertical sketch axis. Okay. Then we can select the angle up to which to revolve. So currently it is 360 degrees, which we are going to do, but let's see if we reduce this angle. Let's say we type 90. Let's type 90, left click somewhere over in the bags to update the view. And now, as you can see here was our sketch. It is only revolving up to 90 degrees. Okay, so in other words, it is only creating one fourth of our spinning top. And you can increase this as well. And as you can see, it is increasing the angle up to which it is revolving. And if you go all the way to 360, it does a complete revolution, which is what we require. Okay. So you can also go in the opposite direction. For example, 90 was this. In this direction, if we type -90 -90 hoops -90 Oh, it is not doing it. Okay, we can do it all here. It is not going in the negative direction. Okay. And why it is not going in the negative direction is because we have turned down this reverse. If we uncheck it, now it is in the other direction. Okay. So for example, we click on right 90. Now it is 90. This direction, let's go to the top view. It is currently positive 90 degrees in the anticlockwise direction, which is the positive 90, which is the positive anti clockwise is positive, clockwise is negative. If we do the reverse, we don't need to write -90 over here, simply check this reverse pass and it will change its direction to the other side. We don't want that. Let's just continue to increase it or let's just type 360 over here. 360, click over here. Rotate it around, and we basically have a spinning tab ready. Okay. Let's click. Okay. Okay. Now the model is practically ready, but there are small very small issues. One the stop surface is not perfectly flat, and this bottom surface is not perfectly flat either. Otherwise, if we create a spinning top like this, it is not going to spin, because the bottom surface is flat. And we have a fix for that. We can just chooe the fillet tool. File tool is very helpful in creating these kind of surfaces, and it is very often used while creating CAD models. So simply select this fillet tool. First, we will select this circular edge over here. Let's click on that. It is 1 millimeter, click on preview. And that is perfectly fine. So it creates a fillet over here, it's just going to make it easier to handle it basically. Okay? Press Okay, and then rot it around. Okay. Then zoom in. And once again, we will do fill, select fillet tool once again and click on this. Adds. Okay. So radius is 1 millimeter. Let's turn on the preview, see what that is. I think it is perfectly fine. Let's just try to increase this radius to let's say something like 1.15, press over here. Let's increase it a bit more, 1.20. That is perfectly good. Perfectly fine. Press. Okay. So basically, our spinning top is ready. If you want to, you can create fillets over here and over here as well. Okay. But that is the shape in this sketch as well. But I think there is some fillet over here, so let's just do it. Okay? So we will select fillet tool once again, select this circular edge, and then this edge. Okay, turn on the preview, and that is, I think, a bit too much. Okay? So instead of 1 millimeter, we are going to write 0.5. Click over here. Okay, somewhere over here too. Okay. So preview, yes, it is. It has updated its preview. So this is 0.5, and I think that is Perfect for this spinning to. Ready is a 0.5. Let's press Okay, and our model is ready. So we can just save it, not save it, whatever you want to do it. Let's just save it. And let's call it spinning to because we are going to use it in the last class or at the last project of this course. Click Save. I'll just save it on desktop, click Save. It is saved and that is it. That is all for this lecture. 9. Day 4: Part Modelling - Tuning Fork: So in this lecture, we are going to be creating a card model of this tuning fork. Okay. And we are going to be using a new sketching feature. It can also be used for features as well, you will see, and it is called symmetry or mirror, basically. Okay. So this is going to be the tuning fork we're going to be modeling. So let's close this I will set this card and I will create a new parametric part file. Okay, so let's do that. Next thing, you know, we need to create a sketch, so I will go to tasks and click on Create sketch. Next is we need to select a plan. So let's go over the dimensions. Okay, so this is going to be the drawing. So overall dimensions of this tuning fork are going to be this. Its bass is going to be six millimeter, 50 millimeter over here, this length, then 6 millimeters is going to be the distance between this line and this line. Then its prongs are going to be with the length of 70 millimeters. And the distance between them is going to be 12 millimeter, and the width of each prong would be 4 millimeters. So since we are going to be using a feature called mirror or symmetry as it is named in frecud in other software, it is sometimes called mirror or symmetry. So both terms can be used interchangeably. We will only need to create half of it. One half portion and the other one, it will be automatically generated by fread by using the symmetry tool. Okay? So instead of making this sketch, we can do that as well. But instead of making this sketch, we are going to be modeling this portion only. Okay. Meaning, instead of 6 millimeters over here, this portion would be 3 millimeters thick, then 50 millimeter, then six millimeter. So the distance between this point and this point would be 12 -12 we added by two, sorry. It would be 6 millimeters once again, then 70 millimeters over here and four millimeter over there. We only need to make this thing. Okay. So since we are going to be creating a sketch and then using the paired command to bring it upward, so it makes sense that we create this on top lane. Okay. And secondly, since the units are in millimeters, you have the dimensions in millimeters, so our unit system should be chosen accordingly. It is by default in millimeters, so let's keep it at that. Okay, so let's select the top plan, which is going to be X plan, left click to select. Okay. And now let's start creating our sketch. Okay. So first of all, we are going to start from this point. Okay? So let's create this line. Select the line tool over here, and then we will start a line right at the origin. It is going to be 3 millimeters, so its length would be three. I will type three, press Enter, and since it is going to be perfectly horizontal line, so angle would be zero degrees. Let's type zero over there and press. Okay, so type zero. Okay. So if, let's say, I type zero and before pressing the Enter button, if I move around, the angle changes. So after inserting a dimension, you simply need to press Enter to insert that dimension basically into free kit. So let's type zero, press Okay. Okay. Next, we are going to create this line. Which is vertical line with the length of 50 millimeters. So let's click over here, and it is going to be 50 millimeter. And since it is going to be perfectly vertical, so angle would be 90 degrees. So let's type 90, press Enter. Okay. Now, instead of going in this direction, since we don't know the length of this line from this point to this point, we can calculate it, but we don't need to. We're going to do we will create this line. Which starts at the base and then up to this point. This line was 50 millimeters, this would be 50 plus this portion, which is 6 millimeters, so 50 plus six, it would be 56 millimeters, perfectly vertical line. This line would start here at the origin, but this time we will go in vertical direction. So 56 would be length, type 56 plus center, and angle once again is going to be 90 degrees because perfectly vertical line in upward direction, positive axis. So 90 degree angle is set, press enter, and here we have our line. Okay. Next, we're going to create this line. So this is going to be the half of the distance between two prongs, and the total distance, as we know over here is 12 millimeter, so half of it would be 6 millimeters. So the line from this point to this point would be 6 millimeters long. Okay. Let's draw that. It will start at this point. So as you know, as you can see that the cursor has the line tool symbol and next to it is the point symbol, which is point inside across here. So this means that the line we are going to create right now is going to be originating from the selected point. If I move a bit downward, that point symbol changes to the line symbols or sketch element like curve, et cetera, that kind of thing. Line segment or curve or arc, anything. It can be anything. So if you are about to start a line on a point, it would be this symbol. If you are about to start originate a line from another line or a circle or an arc or any other thing, then it would be this symbol next to the cursor. So we want to start at this point, which is the endpoint of the previously created line segment. So let's try it, move it around a bit. It is going to be 6 millimeters and it is a perfectly horizontal line, so angle zero degrees. Okay. So now after this, we are going to once again go in the upper direction. Oops. What did I do? I zoom them. Here it is. So we now are going to create this portion. So this line we are going to create right now. The distance between this point and the top is 70 millimeters as we can see. So that means that the distance between the top portion over here to this portion, this point over here is going to be 70 minus the 6 millimeters because this six millimeter distance is counted inside this 70 millimeters. So 70 minus six, that is 64 millimeters. So let's go to fregad and we will start or line here. It would be perfectly vertical line with the length of 64 millimeters. Type 64, press Enter. And since it is vertical, angle once again would be 90. So we will type angle, press, enter. Okay, now let's zoom out a bit and this line goes up to this point. Okay? So let's span by pressing the shift key once again and then middle mouse button and then move it around. Okay? That is if you have the blender navigation style, if you have some other style, the panning, the hot keys for panning would be different as explained in the previous lecture about navigation in free key. Okay. Next, we need to create this width of the prong, which is 4 millimeters. Okay? So it is going to be a simple horizontal line over here, starting at this point. With length of 4 millimeters. Type four angle would be zero present. Next, we will draw a line from this point to this point. This line we know is 70 millimeters as we can see over here. Okay, it is 70 millimeters. So let's type 70 the length. And since this is going to be a perfectly vertical line, but it is going to be in the downward direction in a long negative Y axis. So angle would be 90 but with a minus symbol. So it is going to be minus, so we will type -90. Okay. Then press Enter and the 70 millimeter line is drawn perfectly in the vertical direction but going downward. Okay. Next, what we are going to do, we are simply going to join these two lines. Join this to this. Okay. And we have our sketch. Okay. Let's press scap to exit out of the line too. Now what we need to do we need to create the similar sketch over here as well. Okay? So we can either create that sketch just like we created this one or in this case, we are going to choose the symmetry tool. For the symmetry tool, first of all, we have to select everything that we need to create a mirror image of. And we need this line, this line, all of these lines that we have created. Okay. So you will have to create a box and select all of them, or you can go selecting each one of them individually as well. However, but for some reason, we can also select sketch elements over here, and we can just left click and move while the left mouse button is pressed, you can move upward to select everything. Everything is selected, every sketch element is selected. All of these lines are selected, but for some reason in free care, symmetry tool cannot be accessed if you select all of these lines from here. You have to select them right here in the viewpoint. Okay? So I will left click over here to deselect them or press Escape key. Now, once you press Escape key, you will exit out of the sketcher. Workbench, so you will have to go to model, left click on this sketch and click on Edit Sketch or double click on this sketch to go back to sketcher workbench. Okay. So just to be careful, don't select line segments for creating symmetric profile by using this elements window. Okay. Instead, just select everything like this over here. Okay? So now we have selected everything, and over here at to let meta on magifier. Okay. So here it is the symmetry. Tool. It is. It is this one. I accidentally deselected everything once again. Let me select everything. Now we can access this symmetry tool. It is this one. Okay, symmetry as it says, create symmetric of selected geometry. So we've selected our geometry. So let's left click on it to create it symmetry. Okay. Now as you can see, nothing really happens. Okay? That is because we need to select an axis around which we need to create our symmetric model. But before that, let's see what options we have available for this symmetry tool. There are basically two checkboxes over here under symmetry parameters. The first one is that delete original geometries. If you check this box, it is basically going to create a symmetric image, symmetric profile of the sketch elements you selected, but it will delete the original ones, which basically is going to mean that you are basically flipping the original sketch. Instead of creating a duplicate symmetric or mirror sketch. We don't want that. We want this sketch to stay over here as well, so we will uncheck it. However, if you need to do that, if you need to flip a sketch, you can use this option. The second is create symmetry constraints. And once again, you can it does not make much of a difference in our case, but this basically applies all of the constraints in the original geometries, original sketch elements, and applies applies it to the newly created symmetric profile as well. However, since we are not going to manipulate the created sketch, the symmetric sketch or mirror sketch which is going to be generated, this does not whether it doesn't matter whether we turn it on or not. So I will zoom out, and that is all these options we have. Now, as you can see from the culture, the symmetry tool has been selected, and now we basically need to select an axis around which we need to create. We want to create the symmetric profile. Okay. And that axis can be any single line segment. Okay? For example, if we hover on this line segment, okay? Now, you can see in preview in black lines the symmetric image of the sketch we created. Okay? Similarly, if you hover over this line, it will show you the symmetric profile or the symmetric image of the created profile. According to around this line segment. Also, if we hover over this one, it is going to show us or review the geometry around that line segment. And we can hover over these ones as well to see what would be created if we select those lines as our axis. However, what we require over here is this kind of figure, for our tuning four. So we will select this vertical line, which is basically this line to create symmetric image around. Okay. So I will left click on this line. Okay. Let's bring it over here. Now the preview is visible. Left click, and now our symmetric image has been created. Okay? So our sketch, overall sketch for the tuning fork is basically ready. Okay? So we can close the sketch. Okay. So this is our sketch. However, as you can see, there is a problem. We don't need this line over here, around which we created the symmetry. So for that, we can basically go to you can either double click on this sketch or right click and then click on Edit Sketch. Go back to it, select this line with left click, press the delete button, and it's gone. Now, close out of the sketch. It is still there for some reason. Since we created this sketch this original line that we created first included inside the geometry we selected to create a symmetric image of, it basically duplicated that line as well. That is why there are two lines we deleted one instant. Now we also have to delete it mirror copy, which is basically the same line. We will have to go there again, select this line, delete it for the second time. Now this is green. We can see the vertical axis over here. Basically, this means that there is no line over here. So close, and that line is gone. Now we can simply click on this pad button over here to pad this sketch. Okay? So here it is. Is height is going to be 4 millimeters. So type four, press. Okay. Okay. So our tuning four is basically ready according to this cut, but we are going to do one more thing. Okay? So I previously created models, we have been using the fillet tool to round off the edges. In this case, we are going to be using a different but very similar tool called the JAM fA tool. It is this one right next to Jam fer. And it says hamper the selected edges of a here. Okay? So let's select this and it works very similar to the fillet tool. So we are going to do we are going to select this edge and this edge. Now, these two edges are selected, and the size over here is 1 millimeter. Okay. And the type is equal distance, which basically means, for example, if you look at this edge, it is going to remove material up to 1 millimeter in this axis on this edge on this side, as well as on this side. If you click on this button for preview, it's removed material up to 1 millimeter in this side and in this side as well, we can increase this as well. This is equal distance, meaning remove material equally on both sides. You click on this type, we can select two distances. Now we can choose different distances along each side, basically. So currently it is four millimeter, and the second one is 1 millimeter, meaning along horizontal axis, it is cutting material up to 4 millimeters. But along vertical, it is cutting up to 1 millimeter. So long horizontal, it is cutting four millimeter, long vertical, it is cutting 1 millimeter, and we can change it as well Okay. So by this way, you can independently select distances around along both distances or both axis. The third option is distance at an angle and angle, sorry. This is basically it says that cut four millimeter distance, but the second variable instead of being a different distance, it is angle. Cut 4 millimeters at the angle of 45 degrees. And we can change the angles and distances as well. For this one, we're simply going to use equal distance and I will type six millimeter, which it already was there. Let's type six and press Okay to create JamFR. Now we're going to use the same feature over here as well. Let's rotate this model around on this edge and this edge basically. So once again, I will select hamFR and I will select this edge, rotate around, and I will select this edge. Okay. So this time, if I turn on the preview, as you can see, instead of cutting material, it is adding material along this axis and along this axis. That is because it cannot apply. That is because this is not the edge of a geometry. For example, if we had selected, let's say, this line over here, it would cut material. This Tampi tool would be used to cut material. And since this is the inside edge, this time, the JAMFTol is going to add material up to 1 millimeter along this side and 1 millimeter along this side. Okay. So everything else, these distant types are going to be SAM. So depending on the edge you select, whether it is external edge or internal edge, AMF tool is going to cut or add material, and filler tool works the same way as well. Okay? Depending on the Edge you select, whether it is on the inside or outside, it is going to either remove material or add material to create its desired geometry. Okay. So over here, to create a EM fed profile, it needs to add material, so it is going to add material. Okay. So let's turn on the preview, and for size, I'm going to select 4 millimeters. You can select other variables as well. Let's press Okay, and here we are. Or tuning fork is ready. Okay. So this was all for this lecture. Thank you. 10. Day 5: Part Modelling - Flywheel: I so this is going to be the there for or fourth project of our course. And it is going to be modeling card model of fly wheel. Okay? And for creating this, you'll be learning new features like groove tool as well as the polar pattern. Okay. So this is going to be the fly wheel. It has a groove over here so that a pulley can be mounted on top of it, and it also has a hole in the center to enable it to be mounted on top of a shaft and some holes over here as well. Okay? So let's just close it and start creating it. Model. So I will close it, discard, and I will create a new parametric part file. Okay. So before we go to task, and obviously we have to go to task and click on Create sketch. Okay. And then we will have to select a plan. Okay. So before selecting the plan, let's look at the dimensions. So these are going to be the dimensions, let me zoom in, the dimensions of this fly wheel. It's total radius from this point to this point diameter, sorry, is going to be 30 centimeter. Then you will have the distance between the outer radius and this inner circle over here of the distance between them is three centimeter then three centimeter once again. Then these small circles of three centimeter diameter, then a gap of three centimeter over here as well. Then this middle hole, which is going to be a hole obviously and its diameter is six centimeter. Okay. Now, if you look at it from the front view, obviously, it is going to look something like this 30 centimeter. This is going to be from this point to this point, as we know, it is three centimeter, whereas this overall, its height is going to be six centimeter. And the height of this inner region or the thickness of this inner region would four centimeter. And there is going to be a groove over here and over here as well as you can see, and the radius of that groove is going to be 1.5 centimeter. Okay. So since we have this kind of sketch from front view, so we can model it by using two ways. Either we can create this sketch and then use the pad feature to pull it upward, then pad it once again. For this portion over here, this outer rim, then we can chooe the pocket tool to remove these to create these holes over here and over here, and then we can create the groove, using the groove feature. The second approach would be using the revolution tool to create this geometry. For that, we will have to create the sketch of half portion of this sketch. Okay. So since creating this bulge using the revolution tool saves us a lot of time because we can just create this sketch and then revolve it. However, if you go the pad routes using the pad feature, create this circle, then we will have to create this circle first, this 30 centimeter circle, then pad it upward, then use the pad feature, then create this circle, then use the pad feature once again and the total number of features can increase in that approach. However, it still depends on your approach and however you like to model. Okay. So let's close it, and let's start creating the geometry. Okay. Let's go back to free gD and we will select the front plan because we are going to be choosing this sketch and use the revolution feature. If you are to pad, if you intend to use the pad feature, if you want to go that route, you will have to select the top plan for it. Okay? Okay. So let's select, before selecting the plan, we need to make sure that we are in the right measurement system. Okay? So it is millimeters by default. However, if we go to the dimensions, all of these dimensions are in centimeters. So that means we need to change our measurement system. So let's go to free cad, click on this button, left click and we simply need to select the one where the unit for length is in centimeters. And if we go downward, it is over here. Okay. However, for this one, the unit of length, it is the building juro system, and for this one, the unit of length is centimeter than meter square for area and meter cube for volume. And we don't necessarily need to evaluate area and volume. We are only concerned with centimeters length and centimeters, so we will simply select it. Okay? So now our proper dimension unit system is selected. Let's select this front plan and start creating our sketch. Okay, so let's do it. So first of all, we will create this rectangle from this point to this point. Okay, here to here. Now, the overall diameter is 30 centimeter. So now since we are using the revolution tool, we will have to create the half of model. So the distance from the center to this outer portion to this line is going to be half of 30 centimeter. That is 15 centimeters. Okay? Then we have this portion from this point to this point. The distance is three centimeter, as we can see over here. Okay? So 15 minus three comes out to be 12. Okay? Meaning the distance from this point to this point, the length is 12 centimeter and the height is four centimeter. And that is the rectangle we will create right now. Okay? So let's go to free gad, select the rectangle tool over here and start creating a rectangle starting at the origin. Okay? Let's do it. Let's move it outward. So its length would be 12 centimeter, as we have evaluated right now, 12 press Enter, then its height would be four centimeter and press Enter. Okay. Here it is, or, let's pan it out or let's zoom outwards. Zoom out. Here it is rectangle. Now we need to create this portion over here. This is four centimeter from this point to this point is six centimeter. Meaning, let's me zoom in. Meaning the distance between this point to this point is 1 centimeter. Similarly, the distance between this point to this point is 1 centimeter as well. From this one to this over here, it is three centimeter, as we know from here, as we can see here, and this distance is six centimeter. Okay. So let's create it. So first of all, we don't need this line because there is no line over here. Okay? It is all one scale. So we will simply left click, sorry, to first press scape to exit out of the line tool. Now it is only single cursor, meaning no tool sketch tool has been selected. So let's left click to select this line, press delete, it is deleted. Now we can select the line tool and create our lines over here. Let's click on this point and create a line. It would be vertical line, but first we have to enter its dimension. So millimeter 1 centimeter, sorry, type one, press Enter. Now we have to select the angle. Since it is going to be perfectly vertical line, angle would be 90 degrees. Type 90, press enter. Then we will create one line over here. Once again, 1 centimeter length and ankle is also going to be 90 degrees, but in the downward direction, so it would be -90. Okay? So -90, enter. Next, click on this line, this point, the ending point of the line that we just created, and now we will create this horizontal line, okay? This one ops this one, which has the length of three centimeter. Let's type three centimeter first its length. Then since it is going to be perfectly horizontal line, so angle would be zero degrees type zero percenter. Then create a line over here. This line would be perfectly vertical, but with the length of six millimeter centimeter, sorry. Type six, enter angle would be 90 because perfectly vertical and in the upward direction. Here it is. Next, we simply need to create a line starting at this point and indicate this point. Let's join these two points. Okay. So now we have our sketch ready. Now we can simply create the groove, and I will just create it right now, but there is going to be a problem. Okay? So let's create the groove. Okay? For that groove as we can see over here, let me move over here here. Okay. So it is half circle, semicircle, which necessarily means that it is an arc, arc with a radius of 1.5 centimeter, and it goes around 180 degrees. If it goes complete 360 degrees, then it would be a circle. So it is an arc. So we simply need to create an arc right at the middle point of this line, okay? This line that goes from here to here. For this one, we can simply go to the arc tool. Let's select this. It is right next to the line tool. Okay. Now for this one, the mechanism is, first of all, you will need to select the center of the R. For example, that center is here, I will just create an arc over here for demonstration purpose. Okay. So let's create an arc here. Now, this point that we have just selected would be its center. Then we need to select the radius of the arc as you can see over here. Let's say two centimeter, type two enter. Then we have to select an angle, and this angle would be the starting point of that arc. So this complete revolution, as you can see, we have a circle over here. Okay? So in this circle, where do you want to start this arc? If you want to start it right here, here, you will type zero degree. If you want the starting point over here, you will type 90 degree, or whatever your angle. Is the starting point of that arc is. Let's say if we want to start it at let's say 60 degrees. Let's type 60 here. Now, that arc begins over here at the angle of 60 degrees. Then we have to select another angle, and that angle is basically the total angle of the arc. In other words, the total length of the R. If let's say 90 degrees, and now we have an arc, which is the length of 90 degrees, starting at 60 degrees from the horizontal line and digat over here. Okay? So this is how you can create an arc. So let me just select this arc and delete it. Let's select the arc tool once again, and now we will create an arc over here. So this arc, as you can see, it will begin or its center would be the midpoint of this line, or the midpoint of this line. So if you just hover over this line, move downward, it will snap to its center and here it is. Okay, here, here. So now we can start our arc. This is going to be the center point. Then we can move outward. Then we can select the radius. Radius is 1.5 centimeter as we know. Then we want this arc to start over here and end over here. So it's starting angle would be 90 degrees. Okay. Then it will go in this direction and will go up to 180 degrees, 180, press enter. Now we have our groove as well, the geometry profile for our groove as well. We simply need to delete this portion over here. However, if we left click on this line, press delete, it will delete this entire line starting from this point to this point. But we don't need that. We need this line over here and over here. Okay. So you can either just go to Line tool right now and create that line or what you can do. Let me control that, press control that to undo and what we can do, we can select this tool over here. Okay, it is right before the external geometry tool, and it is trim edge. So this tool is basically going to trim sections of a line from point to point. Okay? For example, if I select it, now if I click on this line, it will only delete from this point to this point. Okay? It will not delete the entire line. In other words, it will trim that line segment, which was from here to here. Okay? So it will trim it and we divide it into two lines, this line and this line. Okay? So if I click left click here. Okay. So now, since we have not inserted any dimensions, et cetera to these portions, we just created a line. So when we delete this line, when we cut out this line, the entire sketch, it gets messed up. Okay? For example, let's say if I select delete this portion, nothing happens. That controls that. To undo if I delete this portion, once again, nothing happens. But if I delete this portion, our entire sketch is changed. Okay? It is deformed. Okay. So why is that? That is because when it deletes this portion, it does not know the distance between this line, the length of this new line and this new line that is created. Okay. So what you can do, we can delete this line, okay, or before deleting that line, trimming that line, we can go to dimension tool. Okay, or let's not go to dimension tool. Let's select this line and select this line, and let's mac them equal. Okay? So now this line and this line is equal, and this line is already 6 centimeters. Or let's just create dimension tool. Select dimension tool over here. Click on this line and let's make it six centimeter. So it was already six centimeter, but we did not assign that dimension. Okay? So now it is giving me an error that is this dimension is not required, basically. Okay. So now what we can do, so we will delete this line and everything will be sorted out hopefully. So let's select to trim as tool once again and trim over here. Okay. And once again, this sketch gets messed up. Okay. So you can use this trim edge tool to cut edges. However, sometimes it is going to result in a lot of issues like you can see over here. Okay. So these kind of issues occur very often in free cad and the reason for that is that it is an open source and free software. Okay. In other pad softwares like solid works or Autodesk inventor, et cetera, these kind of things rarely happen or they'll happen less often. Okay, these things used to happen way more in the previous version. Okay, though in the newer 1.00 version, things are still a lot better. So what we will do, we will not use the rim tool. So I will press scap. I will select this line and simply delete it. Then we will select the line tool, create a line over here, starting here and ending here. Then another line starting here and ending here. Okay, here. Now our sketch is ready. However, you will see that the revolution would not be possible, which is once again an error in free care. Maybe it happens, let's see. Let's close now we need to simply revolve this sketch. Let's do it. Let's click on this Revolution tool. So this time it carries it out perfectly. So no issue. Or before that, let me just control S and save this fly wheel because we will also create groove by using a different approach. Fly wheel. Let's type flywheel. Verian one. Okay. So let's save it. And now we can simply click on this Revolution tool. So we need complete revolution around 360 degrees, and the axis would be vertical sketch. That is perfectly fine. Press Okay. Okay. So here it is our fly wheel. Now we need to create these holes basically. Okay. So let's do it. Let's select this surface. So obviously that hole is somewhere here in the center. So let's select this surface and click on create sketch. Okay? So obviously it is going to be a circular hole, so we will use the circle tool. So I'll select the circle tool and create a circle on its center. Okay. And this circle is six centimeter or this circle has diameter of 6 centimeters. So type six precenter. Okay. Now, we can go and create these small circles as well. Okay? So in the previous version, they used to be the polar array or circular array tool or circular pattern tool in sketcher. For some reason, it is not available in fricat 1.0. They obviously added a lot of things, but they also removed a lot of things. Okay? So that option is not available in sketch. Okay, and sketcher, which means that for these holes, we will have to create a separate sketch and then use the array feature or the polar array feature basically in in feature section, basically, for that newer sketch. So for this one, let's just close it. And since we want to create a hole, meaning we need to remove material, so we would use the pocket tool. Let's click on that. It is removing material. So we want to create a complete hole. So instead of inserting dimensions, we can simply go to type and click on through, meaning remove material through everything. Okay? And it will create a full hole. Through all hole. Press Okay, and there it is, we have our central hole for mounting this fly wheel on a shaft. Okay? Now let's create these small holes. Once again, we will select this surface and go to create Sketch. Okay. So for this one, we will only create one circle. And then we will generate another circle by using polar array. Or polar pattern, basically. So first of all, I will select circle tool and we can create a circle over here either on this vertical axis or on horizontal axis. So let's create it somewhere over here. Let's create this circle and we know the diameter is three centimeter. Okay, so type three centimeter, press. Okay. So now we have a circle, but we need to position it at its appropriate location. So we can either go to create reference geometry, external geometry and create reference geometry out of this circle or these lines that we created. But we don't necessarily need to. Okay? We simply need to assign distance between the center of this fly wheel and the center of this circle, basically. So let's go to dimension and let's evaluate them. Okay? So its center is somewhere over here. Okay, the center of this fly wheel. This central hole, this larger hole has the diameter of six centimeter. So obviously, its radius would be three centimeter, meaning the distance from the center to this point is three centimeter. Then we have the gap over here of three centimeter. So the overall distance from this point to this point is six centimeter, and then we have a newer this smaller circle, basically. Okay. So six centimeter, then this smaller circle has the diameter of 3 centimeters, so its radius would be 1.5 centimeter. So this distance was six centimeter six plus 1.5. That is 7.5, meaning the distance between the center of this circle and center of this circle is 7.5 centimeters. Okay, so you will have to evaluate or do these kind of calculations while creating cared models. Okay? Just in your head or on pepper. Okay? So let's do that. Let's go to dimension two, here, let's select this center and this center. And this would be 7.5 centimeter and press. Okay. So now this circle is positioned correctly. We can close out of the sketcher, and let's select the pocket tool once again. Okay. Let's select the pocket tool. Once again, it is going to be under type, we would select through because we want to create a through hole. Let's do it. Okay. Now let's go to top view here. We need this. So now we have this one hole over here. But over here, as we can see, we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight holes. So either we can edit this sketch that we just created this circle and create these circles as well and then use the pair pocket feature once again to create those holes. However, that is going to take a lot of time. This time, we would use this feature. It is polar pattern, basically. So it is going to create copies of this feature, this sketch, and the feature that is applied on it around a certain angle for the number of times we want it to create. Okay. So if you want to create create duplicates in a vertical line or horizontal line, then for that, we have this feature called linear pattern, and we will do that in the next lecture while creating our heat sink. Okay? You want to create copies of a feature in a circular manner or at an angle, then we will choose polar pattern. Okay. So for this one, simply click on this bucket, which is this pocket, the final pocket, which is the small hole, and we will click on this polar pattern. Let's do it. And now, as you can see, it has already created one copy over here. Okay. But we don't need one copy, we need eight copies. So now if you go over here, here we have certain settings. We have mode, we have angle, and we have occurrences. Occurrences is basically the number of instances or number of duplicates. So currently it is two, so it is only this feature is only occurring two times, one over here, the original one, and one copy. But we want total of eight holes, so change it to, we will change this occurrence to two at. Okay. Now it is created at duplicates. The next option is angle. Okay. So currently, we have selected at occurrences at an angle of 360 degrees. So basically, it is creating at occurrences of the feature that we created, and it is placing them at an equal angle or it is present then at an equal angle throughout the 360 degrees. Okay? So if we divide 360, let's do it 360/8. So it is 45, meaning the angle between this center, center of this circle, and the center of this circle is 45 degrees. Okay? We did not need to provide this 45 degrees. I did that automatically. Okay? Now let's say if you change this angle to 180 degrees. If we do that and then left click over here, now it is creating at occurrences, but only up to 180 degrees. And once again, these are at each consecutive circle is at at equal angle from the previous one. Okay? So for this one, it would be 180 divided by at sort of 22.5 degree angle between each consecutive circle. Okay? So you can select there. Okay. So next option is mode. And currently it is at an overall angle which basically means at directly at the angle that we select. Okay? So I will change it once again to 360 because that is what we want. Okay. And if we change it to offset angle, then what is going to happen? It is going to create those instances at an offset of the angle that we selected. Okay? So currently, the offset is 120 degrees, and it is only creating three copies because only three copies are possible at the settings. So for example, if I type 90, Okay. Now it is creating four copies. Okay? So this is how the offset angle mode works basically. Okay? It will neglect these occurrences, so you can basically select an angle. You can basically select the angle between two consecutive two consecutive consecutive instances or occurrences of the feature that you are creating polar pattern of. And then throughout the entire circle, it is going to determine how many parts it can assign, and then it will basically create those parts. For this time, this occurrence is invalid basically. If we reduce this, once again, let's say if it at 1:40, 45, now we have at because if we say the distance between two consecutive instances or occurrences is 45 degrees, then around a complete circle, it can place at occurrences. So if we select the offset angle, then we type the offset angle. Offset angle is basically the distance or the angle between two consecutive occurrences. If we do this configuration, selecting the offset angle and saying 45, Okay. Then it is going to create eight copies because at angle of 458 copies are possible. Okay? Or if we select overall angle. Now this time, by selecting the overall angle, we can select the overall angle, but we cannot select the distance between num each distance between each consecutive occurrence. Okay. Instead, we will select the number of occurrences that we want, and free CAD will automatically evaluate the distance between two consecutive occurrences. Okay? So you have two approaches to creating your polar pattern, basically. Okay? So this is what we want. Let's press Okay. And as you can see, we have created these holes. Okay. So this is how polar pattern basically works and how you can create flywheel. So let's save it. So Oops, I control as I press the controllers. So what should we do? Okay. Let's go back to this original origin, original revolution that we created. Let's click on double click on that sketch, and we are here once again. Okay? So now we are going to look at another approach for creating the groove, basically. Okay? For this time, I'm going to delete this arc, delete this line, and delete this line as well. And then we will create one line starting over here and ending here. Okay. Now let's close. So now we have the complete fly wheel, but there is no groove. That groove, we're going to create right now. Okay? And for that, we will choose this tool called the groove tool. Sorry, this one here, the groove tool. Okay. So it is basically going to be the opposite of revolution. Okay? So first of all, we need a sketch, basically. Okay? So for that sketch, we need to create, if you look at the front view, we need to create that sketch over here, and that is going to be the sketch of an arc, Okay, which is going to basically derive our groove. But once again, for that sketch, we need a plan. Okay. So since this is not a flat surface, we cannot select this surface and create a sketch on it. For example, if we do it, click on Create sketch, it says you need a planar facepot for a sketch. We cannot do that. Okay? And also, we cannot create a sketch on original XY and Z X or those kind of plans. Okay. What we need is a new plan over here. So basically, we need to create a new plan. For that plan, we will select this line. Okay. And if you see under the tasks, you have certain options. You have Fillet, you have JAMFAR and under here, you create a datum plan. So depending on your requirement, you can also create new plans for your modeling as well. Okay? So if I select this, create a datum plan. Now we can create a new plan, which we can use for creating sketches. However, it is currently in the wrong direction. We need to rot at it. Okay? So we want it over here. Okay? So basically, it means we need to rot at it by 90 degrees around X xs. Okay? So you can change the distance of this plan if you salad, move it in excess by five centimeter type five. Now it is moved over here, okay? Let's put zero over once again. If you want to pull this plan in the upward direction, you would insert distance in the upward z axis. Let's set five centimeter, move it in z direction. Type five over here, left click. Now the plan is moved over here, five centimeter from this position of the line that we selected. Once again, I will move it back to zero. Okay, we need to rot at it. Okay? You can rot at it around X, Y, and Z xs as well. But we want to need to rotate this plan around X xs by 90 degrees. Okay? Type 90 degrees over here around X xs, left click. And now the plan is in perfect position. If you go to the front view, we can directly face we are directly facing that plan. Okay? So that is what we need. Press Okay. And now we have this new plan, which we can left click to select and create sketches on it. Okay. So let's just do that. Okay. For this one, once again, we will need to create that same arc that we created for our groove. Okay. So obviously, we will need to extract this line to be used as a reference because we need the middle point of this line as the center of that arc. So I will select this tool, create external geometries, and we will select on this line. Okay, so we have one line created over here as reference. Next, we will select the arc tool again hover over this line so that it snaps to center, and here it is. Okay. Once again, the radius would be 1.5 centimeter. It would start at 90 degrees and then we'll go in this direction up to 180 degrees. Now, the arc has been created, but we cannot see it. That is because it is inside this three dimensional geometry. Okay? To see that arc, what you can do, you can go over here this button. So let me turn on the magnifier. Okay. Zoom in, and it is this button over here. If you click on this drop down menu, here you can change the view of the view methodology of you in your viewpot. So currently it is as is basically, or which is by default, which means flat lines, meaning everything. The edges are shown and the flat lines, the geometry is shedded as well as the as well as the lines or edges are highlighted in black color as well. Okay? However, if you change it to, let's left click on it again. Let's say shaded. Okay. Now, once again, it is shedded, but we cannot see the lines. As you can see over here, there is no black line over here. Okay? They are not highlighted. The edges are not highlighted. It is only shaded. Okay. Another option is no shading like this, which was previously selected or the default configuration. Okay. Or then we have wireframe. So by using the wireframe, what you can do is you can basically see inside three dimensional geometry. So we can see this is the hole. We can see these holes over here as well. So we can see everything inside the geometry, and what we required to see, what we wanted to see was this arc, and we can see this arc as well, which is this one, and it is inside this geometry. Next, we need to create a line, okay, starting at this point ending at this point. So now our sketch is ready. So let's close it and move around. Okay? So here it is our sketch. So currently as you know, we are in wireframe mode, so we cannot see the fly wheel itself. We can only see the lines and we can only see inside of that fly wheel as well. So we can simply reverse change it back to our original what was the original shedding or view, which was no shading. Okay? No shedding mode, and here it is. Okay, or you can turn on the shedding mode. Okay? Shaded with flat lines. This looks better in my opinion. Okay? So we need to select create a groove over here. And for this one, we would select this tool, groove tool, which is basically the opposite of revolution. It is going to do a complete revolution after that sketch, but instead of adding material, it will remove material. So left click on this groove tool. Okay, so it is not doing anything because it's vertical sketch axis, which is currently selected over here is not valid. It cannot basically remove material around there. Okay? What we need to do we need to change this axis from vertical sketch axis to this vertical axis, which is Z axis. So we will change it to bass Z axis, and now it is removing material. Okay? Similar to revolution tool, you can select the angle here as well. For example, if we select 180, Okay. Now it is only removing material from this point to over here, this point. Okay? So this groove tool works, same as revolution tool. The only difference is that it removes material instead of adding it. Okay? So I will try change the angle again to 1360, sorry, and press. Okay. Now our flywheel is ready. We can also select the plan over here or select the plan over here, right click and here it is Toggle visibility. Or you can simply press the spacebar key, which is the hot key for it to hide it basically. Select it, press space bar, and now that plan is hidden. So this is how you can model flywheel in free kit. So you basically learned about creating polar pattern as well as choosing the groove tool. So this is all for this lecture. Thank you. 11. Day 6: Part Modelling - Heatsink: So this is going to be the day six or sixth project in free cad modeling. Okay. And this time, we are going to be creating this heat sink. And in the last lecture while when we were creating the flywheel, we used the polar pattern tool. However, this time, we're going to do the same thing, but it is going to be linear pattern. You will see what that is all about. Okay? So this is going to be the shape. There is a bass over here, which is going to be directly in contact with electronic chip or CPU in computer if it is used for that. And then you have the heat sink and you have fins. You have one, two, three, four, five, six, 78 and ten fins and ten fins over here and ten fins over here, and there is a small gap between them as well. Okay. So the dimensions for this is going to be this. So it is going to be the heat sink is going to be 75 by 75 by 75 millimeters, meaning the total dimension is going to be from this point to its width, length, and height is going to be 75 millimeters. There are going to be a total of ten fins in one row and ten in the other row, so total of 20 fins, basically. There is going to be the best over here, this bottom part is going to be five millimeter, and then this portion over here is 5 millimeters as well. Whereas the total thickness of the fin is going to be 5 millimeters. So let's go back to frekad. I will just close this and I'll click on new parametric part to create a new freaked document. So let's do that. Okay. So just a second. Okay, now it's better. Okay. So first of all, as you know, we have to go to tasks and create a sketch. So I will go to task, click on Create sketch. Okay. Then, we need to make sure that our unit system or system of units is the proper. So by default, it is in millimeters and we have our dimensions in millimeters. So we don't need to change anything. Okay. So for this one, we are going to be selecting this top plan or X plan because we are going to be creating this heat sink from the bottom up. Okay. So let's click click on that. And first of all, we're going to be creating this base. Okay? So we will start from this portion. And the dimensions of this base is 37 multiplier by 37 multiplier by five, meaning its length is going to be 37 millimeters, its width is going to be 37 centimeters, and its height is going to be 5 millimeters, which is going to be the dimension we are going to be providing it while applying the bad feature. Okay. So first, we will have to create this. So basically, we will create a rectangle with length which will actually be a square with the length of 37 millimeters. Okay. So let's do that. Now we can create a rectangle, as you know, by clicking on this rectangle tool and then creating a rectangle like this, like we have always been creating rectangles. However, we are not going to be using this type of rectangle. Okay? So this type of rectangle, as you know, is it is a rectangle, but it is sometimes also called as corner to corner rectangle. Basically, when you are creating this rectangle, left click, you will select the first corner and then move around to select the second corner. So that is why this methodology is called as corner to corner rectangle. Okay. We can do that still over here, but that is going to be a bit difficult while creating the upper portion of the heat sink. Okay. So for example, for this one, you will need two rectangles. So first, we will create this rectangle. Okay. Then we will have to create this larger rectangle on which these fins of the heat sink are going to be placed on as well. Okay. So if we create that corner to corner rectangle, there are going to be issues. For example, if we draw the first rectangle like this, then creating the second rectangle, something like this and making sure that the center of both of these rectangles is same, it is going to be difficult. Okay? To to make sure that the centers are Sam. Instead, I will just press scape Control A, Control A, or you're not seeing the hard key, so just a second. Okay, press Control A or just drag around and select everything, press delete. So this time, we will create or rectangle by using a different methodology. If you click on this drop down menu right next to this rectangle button. Okay, let me turn on magnifier. Okay. So here it is. So for example, not for example, you can see over here that right next to this rectangle tool, you have this dropdown menu. Would left click on that, we have other options as well. Okay. So the kind of rectangle we are going to be sing for this lecture is going to be the centered rectangle. Okay? So left click to select that. Now we have the centered rectangle selected. Okay. Now if you left click on the origin, and then move around, as you can see, instead of selecting the first corner, we are actually selecting the center of that rectangle and then selecting another corner. Okay. So this rectangle is going to be created by this means because later, we have to create another rectangle and both of those rectangles have to be at the same center. Okay. So now we have to once again, the other procedure is going to be similar. Okay. So press scab, I will just create it again. Left click at the origin to make sure that the origin is its center. Its length is going to be 37 type 37, presenter, type 37, presenter, again. And now the sketch for our base is ready. So I will click on this closed button over here and we will use the pad feature. So I'll click on pad. Okay. And the length for this pad is going to be, as we can see over here, it is this portion, so it is 5 millimeters. So I will type five over here. Left click somewhere over here to update the view and click Okay. Okay. So that is our bass or the portion of the heat sink, which is going to be directly in contact with the CPU or any other electronic equipment, it is supposed to cool. Okay. So now we will left click on this top surface under tasks, you will create another sketch, so we will click on this, create Sketch button. Okay. Now we will create another rectangle once again using the centered rectangle tool. Okay. So once again, we will start our rectangle at the center or sorry, at the origin. And since we selected the origin as the center for the previous rectangle, so they're both going to be concentric. For this one, its length is going to be 75 and width is going to be 75 as well. Let's zoom out a bit, and that rectangle is going to look something like this. Let's click on close, and now we are going to use the pad feature on secain. Left click on pad on second. This is going to be, if you look at the dimensions, it is this portion from here to here. Once again, it is 5 millimeters. I will tag five over here, click over here to update the view and press. Okay. Now, we need to create the fins. Okay, these fins. So for that, obviously, we will have to create the sketch on top of this surface. So let's left click on this surface to select it. Go to Tasks, click on Create sketch. Okay. So now we have to place or fins over here. Okay? So we have to relate that if we start creating rectangles like this, they're not going to be tied or connected to this previously created rectangle. So we need some external geometry. So I will click on this button. You choose this option, create external geometry to create some reference lines, okay? Extracted from the previously created rectangle. So left click on that and we will click. We can select either any one of these line. These line, all of that will work similar. Okay. So let's create this line. Okay. Then we will go to rectangle. But this time, we are going to be creating the normal rectangle or the corner to corner rectangle. Left click and select this option over here, rectangle. Okay. So we will create one fin over here. Okay. So the width of the fin is going to be 5 millimeters and the thickness of the fin, sorry, and the length of the fin is going to be 30 millimeters. Okay. There is going to be another fin over here as well. Okay, 530. But for the let's create that as well. Or let's not create it. I will do it later because I want to show you something that is a feature in feature or a leg of feature in frictF linear pattern. So I will start creating this Fin. Okay. Now, obviously, we don't need to create any morphins because we will be using the linear pattern, like we used for the fly wheel in the previous lecture. I will click on close, and once again, we will use the pad feature to move this fin upward. And the height of this fin is going to be 65 millimeter, as we can see over here. Okay. So Type 65, click somewhere over here and okay. Okay. Now we need to duplicate this feature, which is this fine is this pad feature pad 002, all over here. Okay, ten occurrences over here and ten occurrences over here. Okay. So let's left click on that, and then we will select this tool over here called linear pattern. In the previous lecture, we used polar pattern. This time, we'll be using linear pattern. Left click on that, and let's zoom out. Okay. Let's go to top view to properly see everything. And once again, it is going to be working very similar to not just similar SAM to SAM is exactly the same as the polar pattern we used in the previous lecture for flyaway. Okay. So you have two modes by overall length and offset. Okay. So first, let's look at overall length. By this overall length, it means that it is the total length through which it is going to place its occurrences. Okay. And this length, currently it is 100 millimeters. It starts at the end over here, this point. Let me zoom out. This point over here, end of the first original occurrence to the end of this final occurrence or the final copy. Okay, so that is right now 100 millimeters. Now, we know that the width of this heat sink is 75 millimeters, and the thickness of each heat sink is 5 millimeters. Okay. So we need to place fins starting at over here, and the last fin should end somewhere over here. Okay? So we need to provide the distance from this point to this point. Okay. And this overall length from this starting point to this endpoint is 75, and the thickness of individual fin is five sorry, this is 75. Okay. The distance from this line, basically, the distance from this point to this point of this heat sink, the length of this heat sink is 75 millimeter, and the thickness of individual fin is five millimeter so the distance we need to provide over here or the length we need to provide over here for this linear pattern is going to be 75 minus five. Okay? Because this distance for this feature is calculated from this mode, and we want the last fin to end over here. Because if you directly enter 75, which is the length of this heat sink base of this heat sync, type 75 over here, click Okay, click over here to update the view. And then it places this last fin right at the end of this bass, which is out of the bass. Okay? So basically, over here, we need to type 75 minus five, five, which is the thickness of the fin. So it would be 70. Okay. Now that fin is placed over here. Next, we need to select the number of occurrences. Okay? So we need how many fins, ten fins. Okay. So you can select whatever number you like. That's increase. As you can see, it is increasing. And it will automatically determine the appropriate distance between individual fin to satisfy the number of occurrences and the total length we have selected. Okay. So let's type. Then Okay, so now we have ten fins. Or the second methodology is by offset. Okay? And in this offset, you will not select the total length. You will select the number of copies or the number of occurrences, and the center to center distance between two fins. Okay. So you can select whatever distance you like under here, offset. It is going to be the distance from the one fin to the other fin, or it is basically the distance of a same point of a point on one fin or the first fin or the first occurrence to that same exact point on the next consecutive fin. For example, if you take the distance to the first point to be here at the start of the fin, then it would be distance from this point to this point. Okay. If we say that this distance is this point, starting from this point to this point, then it would be that distance. So it is a distance between two same points on two consecutive occurrences. Okay. So we can go back to overall length. So depending on what you're trying to create, you can chooe whatever mode you like overall length or by offset. Okay. Now, this is the limitation of using one of the limitations of modeling in free cat and it is in linear feature. Linear pattern feature. And hopefully it is updated in the future lecture. Okay. So if it was any other PADD package, we can create we would have been able to create the same row of all of these occurrences over here as well. Okay. So in free cat, you can create linear patterns in only one direction. Okay. So now if I want to copy these ten occurrences of these ten fins which I've created over here over here as well, I cannot do that. Either I have to select horizontal sketch axis or vertical sketch axis. We cannot select two axises. Okay. So you cannot create a pattern or array, basically. For example, if you put one feature over here and then create an array in both X direction and Y direction. Okay, you cannot do that in free care, but you can do that in other premium cat packages like solid works, et cetera. Okay, so I will just press. Okay, let's rotate and now we have one row of fins. Okay. Now let's say now we need to create the second row. Now let's say we select this linear pattern, which is a feature, and let's say now we try to use the linear pattern feature again on this previously created linear feature to create the second row over here. However, in free cat, that once again is going to be a problem. Okay? So for example, if we try to do that, left click on this and then click on linear pattern again, it will not carry out the operation. It as you can see over here, only additive and sub tractive features can be transformed using linear pattern or polar pattern. So we cannot do that. Okay. So that is a limitation in free cat, which I hope is corrected, very soon in a newer version. Okay. So the only way to create this second row as well, second row is going back to this pad, which was this first fin that we created, and fortunately, free cat is a parametric modeling software. And the best thing about a parametric modeling software is that we can go back to edit the sketch, which was over here and modify it basically. And it will then carry out the subsequent operations automatically. We don't need to do anything further. So I will go over here. I will expand this pad, too, which was this first fin that we created, and then double click on this sketch, which is the sketch for that pad. Okay. Zoom out and here it is our sketch. Now we simply need to create one more fin over here. So let's click on this rectangle tool, start a rectangle over here. Width thickness is going to be five or the fit is going to be five and length is going to be 30. Okay? Now let's close, and then it automatically applied the pad feature to that modified sketch that we created, and then it also automatically updated the linear pattern according to the edits we did to that sketch. Okay. So this is basically how to use This is going to be or heat in completed, and basically you learned in this lecture that to use the linear pattern, and what are some of the discrepancies or limitations of using linear patterns in free cat. This was all for this lecture. Thank you. 12. Day 7: Part Modelling - Gears, Sprockets & Shafts: I so this is going to be the day seven or seventh project of our course in free cad. Okay. And this time, we're going to be learning how to create gears, sprockets, and shafts. Okay. So this lecture is going to be a little bit different because we will not have to create any kind of sketch or do any of those things. That is because free CAD has built in tools to create gears, sprockets, and shafts. Okay. And we will see how to do that. Okay. So I'll just close all of these. Okay. Okay. So we'll create a new parametric part file, and this time we don't need to go into sketching. The only thing we need to do at this point is to select or appropriate measurement units. And that is standard, we are going to be working in that standard unit system. So we don't need to change anything there as well. Okay. So first of all, we'll be creating gears. Okay. So for gears, free cad has a tool. You don't need to create any sketch. If you go over here, okay, you click on this part Design. So currently you are in the part design Wpen, so I will just go back. Okay. So this card, I will create a new parametric part file which will take you to part Design Wpench and it will also create this drop down menu, called part design over here as well. If you left click on that, here you will have different type of options or tools basically inside the park design workbench which you can choose. Okay. And there are many options like you can create primitive features, subtractive features. These are basically all of the same things that are available over here as well. However, there is one more option here or three more options, basically. If we go down over here, we have these three options, Sprocket valued gear, and shaft design wizard. So first of all, let's select in valued gear. Okay? Zoom out and there you have automatically created you have gear sketch automatically created for you. For this, you only need to provide some parameters over here. You need to provide the number of teeth, module, and pressure angle. These are the three required or the most important features. There are other options over there as well. Before we do that, let's go back over here to PowerPoint and let's see what all those values those terms basically mean. Module is basically the ratio of pitch diameter and number of teeth. So number of teeth is self evident that it is the total number of teeth on gear. Okay, so for example, over this, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, 11, 12. So number of teeth would be 12, the value of this in bitwel. Now let's talk about this pitch diameter. So let's say we create three circles over here, one circle over here, okay, which is at the root of all of these teeth. Okay. Then another over here. Okay. So I'll just create a rough circle, something like this. Okay. So this top circle, which is at the peaks of gears, it is called a a dandom circle. Okay. And this bottom one is called a dedendum circle. This is gear terminologies. Okay? Okay. Now if we create another circle, which is not going to be a real circle, meaning it is not going to be driving any specific geometry over here. Okay. This circle is going to be between both of these circles. Like this. Meaning, let's say if this is one specific tooth, this circle will pass directly through the middle of this specific tooth. Okay. This circle, it is an imaginary circle, but it is used to drive these different kind of variables and parameters for gears. This circle is called a Pitt circle. Okay. And this P over here is the diameter of this pitch circle. Okay. Then you have two different terminologies as well. Okay? This distance, okay, from the pitch circle to the addendum circle, this is called as addendum coefficient. Okay. Then we have this distance over here, this is called as dedendum coefficient. Okay, so these are the different terminologies you need to understand to create gears using free cad value gear tool. Okay. So let's press close and go back to free Gad. Okay. So first, you will have to select the number of teeth. Let's say I select 15. So now or gear has 15 teeth. Next, you need to select the module, which is this term. So it is P by N, whatever number you put over here, number of teeth, then it is going to relate that number of teeth to whatever module you create. Then using this equation, it is basically going to the number of teeth the value of N is entered over here and then value of M module is entered over here. Using these two variables, free gad will automatically determine P pitch diameter, and then depending on that, it is going to adjust the sketch of this gear over here. Okay, so you can put any number of Let's say 2.35. Okay. Here it is. Then you have pressure angle. So pressure angle basically is another terminology or variable. So basically, there are going to be more than one gears, which are going to be connected or matted with one another. For example, you have one gear over here, so I'll just create a circle, but do keep it in mind that this is a gear and has teeth. It is going to be in connection with another gear. As well. Okay? Because that is why gears are used. They're used to transmit rotatory motion from one shaft to another. Okay? So this gear is mounted on one shaft. This gear is mounted on another shaft. So the teeth of these gears will connect with each other over here, which is called as matting of the gears. Okay? So it is going to be something like this. So this is teeth of gear one. This is teeth of gear two. Okay. So let's say this one is moving, because this gear is moving, this teeth will collide with this teeth. Okay? So it is going to transmit some force over here, and that force is going to be, let's say, in this direction. Okay? So that force transmission was in this direction, whereas the teeth this teeth on which this teeth collided, its top surface was something like this. Okay. So if you create a line over here, perfectly horizontal line, so this force is being transmitted at a certain angle. And this angle, which is denoted by Theta P in many engineering textbooks, this angle is called as pressure angle. Okay. And depending on whatever pressure angle you select for matting gears, two gears which are going to be matting with one another has to possess the same pressure angle. Okay? And it is usually kept at 20 degrees or 15 degrees. Okay. So I will go over here, so here. Okay. So by default, it is 20, but then other sometimes it is used, 15 is used sometimes 20. So that is this variable. Then you have high precision, which is the precision or the finishing of the gear, and then you can turn it on or off or basically true and false. Or external gear. For example, this gear can be used inside planetary gear systems. Okay? So if that is the case, whether it is going to be used as an internal gear or external gear. Okay. So you can choose yes or no over here or true and false over here. Then you have a tandem coefficient and ddndum coefficient. Which is basically the distance between the pitch diameter to the stop position over here and this root over here. Okay. So for example, If I increase this addendum coefficient, okay, as you can see the distance from this point, this is the pit circle basically to this top surface over here. Basically, from this point, Pit circle to addendum circle. This distance starts increasing if I increase the value of addendum coefficient, and it comes to a point that gear becomes dotary point. Okay? So that is a random coefficient. You can select that according to your need. Okay. Similarly, you can chant the dandom coefficient as well. Okay, distance from the pit circle to the random circle or the root. Then you can select the fillet coefficient of roots. So this is the root, and as you can see this portion over here, it is curved, meaning it is filleted. Okay? So it is basically this portion over here. Okay, it is not going to be perfectly or it's not going to be a sharp change in direction. It is going to be filleted. Okay? So you can change the radius or the fillet cofficient over here. So if you increase this, the fillet increases. If you decrease, the degree of fillet decreases. Okay? Similarly, you can change the filllet of profile shift coefficient as well. And if you increase, it is going to be changing the overall fillt or the smoothness of the gear. Okay. So once you're happy with your parameters provided over here, you can simply click Okay. And now you have a sketch ready for your gear. Now you can use this sketch to apply bad feature evolution or whatever. So the common sense would say that you should apply bad feature, so I will select Bad and let's say let's keep it at 10 millimeters and press. Okay. And there you have gear. Now you can select this surface, go to tasks, click on Create sketch. Okay. And it will give you a warning, but just ignore that. Okay. Create a sketch over here. The warnings are continuing to be shown over here. But I'll just ignore that. Okay? So create a sketch over here, press close. And basically, the GUI is giving some problems as you can see over here, we have black colors and everything is messed up with the GUI guides user interface. So it is obviously a bug in free guide. Okay. So I'll just control, control. Okay, so let's close it. What should Okay. So free guide crashed. Okay. So this kind of things can happen in free kid because it is obviously an open source software. So it is unfortunate that happened, but it still shows you that it can still be a part of the lesson, and it still shows you that this program can crash at times. Okay. So I'll just go to Oops go to part design invalid gear tool, press Okay. Then use the PAD tool. Click Okay. And here we have our gate. Now let's try to do it again. Go to tasks, create sketch. This time, it is not creation. Okay. So I'll create a circle. Something like this or 15 millimeter would be the right amount of radius, close, and then we can use the pocket tool to create a hole. Okay. So under type, let's just select through all because we want to create a rough hole and press Okay. So this is basically your gear ready and it can be mounted on any shaft, provided that that shaft is the radius less than this hole over here. Okay. So that is how you can create gears. Okay. So I'll just close this and we will create another parametric part five. And this time, we're going to be creating sprockets, and they're created very similar to gears. So you go to part design, you don't need to create any sketch. You go to part Design and click on this Sprocket tool over here right on top of involute gear tool. So you click on so sprockets are basically a type of belt drives or chen are used in chen drives. The most famous examples you can see is that they're used in chen drives like this, and they're used in bicycles and many different types of chen drives. Okay. So this sprocket is similar to gear, but it has a bit more pointy teeth, as you can see over here, and a chain is mounted on top of two sprockets in a chain sprocket chain system or a chain drive, basically. Okay. So for example, let's say, the shaft between the shaft on which this small sprocket is mounted, it is going to rotate. So by using this chain, it is going to transfer this rotation from one sprocket to sorry one shaft to another shaft. Okay. So using a chan drive which implements sprockets and a chan, you can transfer torques and force basically from one shaft to another shaft at a large distances. Okay, so let's go to free k. Okay. So for this sprockets, you can select these different parameters as well. You can select the number of teeth. Okay, just like the gears and these different chan pitch and chan roller dimension and tool width toothwidth as well. Or that is what you will have to do if you want to create if you want to create a custom sprocket, if you want to design a sprocket according to standard dimensions, then you can simply use this sprocket reference. And here you have all kind of standard sprocket dimensions. You have C from the standard systems and see this and 160, you can just directly select them. Okay. And you have from ISO as well, some motorcycle and some bicycle Sprocket says, well. Okay. So once you either would have selected the standard dimension tool, dimension part or any specific different chaNpage and other variables you want to insert by yourself if you want to create a custom Sprocket. Just press Okay, go to pad. Okay, so we will have to go to Model and click on this sprocket. So we basically have to select the sketch to apply pad tool. Okay. So click on pad, and here it is. Click Okay, and there you have your Sprocket ready. Okay? If you want to create holes and other things over here, like you can see over here, you have this hole, the central holes, then some holes over here and these slots, you can create those as well if you want. Okay. So this basically how you create sprockets. Now let's move on to shafts. Okay, so I'll just close this one. This file as well, create another parametric file. And once again, we will not go to sketch. We will click on this part design, and we will click on this shaft design wizard. So let's click on that. And here it is the shaft design Wizard. So by default, it is going to be creating a stepped shaft, meaning if I go to the front view, it is a shaft which has two different diameters. It has two portions of two different diameters. We have portion one over here and another portion over here. Okay. And you can independently select the parameters for both of these portions. For example, going from left to right, this is portion one, and this is portion two. And over here, you can select the appropriate variable, appropriate number for all of these parameters. Let's bring it out a bit like this, so that we can see everything over here. So over here we have the length of P one and P two. For part one, it is 40 obviously it is going to be in millimeters and part two is going to be it is 80 millimeters and we can change that we can enter whatever number we like. Let's say I want part one to be 100 and the second, so when I typed 100 the shaft review updated over here, and this smaller portion changed its length to 100 millimeters. Let's say I want this to be what should it be? 75. Okay. So this is now 75. You can also select the diameter. So by default, currently it is 50. Let's say I want this portion to be 30 and the other portion to be 50. Okay. And let's say you want a shaft which is not stepped, which is the same, which is the same diameter all over. So you can simply select the same diameter for both of these portions. So for example, part one, this portion is 30 millimeter. So for second portion, which is this portion, type 30 over here again, and now you have a uniform shaft. It is going to give you an error, but you can basically ignore that. Okay. So let's say now I wanted 40. Okay, now it is 40. Then you have in a diameter. So by default, it is going to be zero. However, you will increase this number or you will set a number of uron if you want to make any one of these shafts or if you want to make this shaft hollow. Okay. So for example, if for the first portion, let's say, I type 15, Okay. So it'll create a hole through this shaft of 15 millimeters. And once again, now, if you insert the inner diameter for only one portion, the first portion like we did over here, the second portion is still zero. But as you can see, it is creating a hole throughout the shaft. Okay? So that is going to be the default approach for creating shafts using shaft sit in frigate. However, let's say you want the hole over here to be of different diameter. So instead of 15, let's say on the second portion, you can type the inner diameter for that. Let's say 25 millimeter. Then it creates a different diameter hole over here. Now you have 15 and 25. It is going to create a hole throughout the shaft like this. Okay. So then you have the start type edge type, which is nun, and it is going to be none by default, so you cannot change there. So basically, about this inner diameter. So it is basically going to be using the higher number you select. So right now it is 15 for the first portion, 25 for the second portion. So it is creating a hole throughout this shaft with the radius with the diameter of 25 millimeter. Okay. Now it is 25. Let's say now I make this 128. Okay. Then it will only apply. I will create a hole using this 28 millimeter in a radius applied to portion one. Whatever larger number is applied to entered over here for the inner diameter, it is going to create a hole throughout the shaft according to of the dimension of that ended diameter. So you can basically keep one of them as zero, any one of them, and then insert diameter over here, like 20. Okay. Okay. So then you have start edged sorry you have constraint time. Okay? So obviously these shafts are going to be used for a specific mechanical engineering problem, or any other kind of problem. So there are going to be constraints. So for example, over here, you have a constraints for portion one and portion two. However, these constraints are not exactly for this constraint which is fixed over here under portion one and force over here are portion two. These are not for this portion and this portion separately. Okay, everything over here on top like length, diameter, and a diameter is this portion for this one, separate is separate for this portion. And by one, we mean this portion, and by two, we mean this portion. But for constraints, by one, we mean the internal inside of this shaft, and by two, we mean the outside of this shaft. Okay. So currently, the inside of this shaft is fixed, and you have constraints shown over here as fixed. These are the symbols for fixed constraint, meaning the inside of the shaft is not going to be moving. Whereas the outside of the shaft is set to force, meaning there is going to be some force applied on this outside surface of this shaft. It could be somewhere over here or somewhere over here. Okay. So while you are creating when your goal is just to create the model of a shaft, the constraints over here are meaningless. You can simply left click on that to select none. Okay. However, if you also intend to do some kind of analysis, finite element analysis, then these constraints do have a lot of meaning, and we will do that in a future lecture. Okay? So you can select different type of constraints like fixed force, bearing, gear, pulley, whatever. Okay? But for right now as we are just creating the model, we are learning how to create a model of a shaft, so we don't need to apply over here. Okay. So we will do analysis, and over there, we will use these constraints for conducting finite element analysis. For these kind of shafts. Okay. So you can select other options over here like you can select, basically. So depending on whatever variables you select over here. So for example, I will make the inner diameter to be zero, Okay, zero. Okay, so now this shaft is not hollow. Okay. So this is how you can create shafts using shaft visit. So that is all for this lecture. And in this lecture, you learned how to create gears, sprockets, and shafts without creating any sketch. Okay. So once you create this shaft, you can click Okay, and here you have your shaft. Now, you can select any one of these surfaces. Let's say this surface or this surface. Let's select this surface. Go to tasks and create sketch. Okay. So by directly, you will not be able to do that. You will have to make this geometry independent. Okay. By making it independent, you are basically cutting its ties to all of the previously entered parameters. Okay? So if you want to create, let's say, now if you want to edit the parameters of the shaft, you can double click on it. Okay? Drop down this revolution and double click on it. And basically what Free cat basically did using the numbers we entered, it automatically created a sketch, and then use the Revolution tool on top of it. Okay. So everything that we have created over here, so if you manually created this sketch and then use the Revolution tool, you would end up with the same shaft. But the shaft design visit gives us a much quicker approach or much quicker methodology to create shafts. Okay. So now you can select any one of these surfaces. Let's say this and click Create. So basically, when you create shafts using shaft design wizard, they are locked or they are not independent. Okay? So you will have to create an independent copy to create sketches on top on top of the shafts, created using shaft designs. I hope that makes sense. Okay. So let's press Okay, and now you can create sketches over here and modify everything if you want to. Okay. So this was all for this lecture, and you learned how to create shafts, gears, and sprockets without creating any sketches. Now, still, if you want to create the component, the mechanical elements by choosing the traditional modeling approach of creating sketches, you can do that as well. However, these tools provide us with a very quick way to create these mechanical elements. Thank you. 13. Day 8: Part Modelling - Nuts & Bolts: So this is going to be the AD project or day Ed in our course on free cad. And in this lecture, we are going to be learning how to use add ons, how to download add ons and how to install add ons and how to basically use them. So let's first go over what add ons actually is. So as you know, in free cad, everything like creating parts, drawings, sketches, et cetera, is carried out in workbenches. And you can select all of those workbenches over here. Okay. So these are the work pinches assembly beam part design part, sketcher and many more which we have been using to this point in this course. They come with the free cad pre installed. However, you can also install more add ons on top of these in free cat to expand the functionality of the software. And these addons are usually made by the community of free CAD. And the reason for their existence is because free CAD is an open source software and everyone can contribute to its development. Everyone can create some tools, and those tools can help with expanding the functionality of the software. Okay. And the one we are going to be using or downloading and installing is going to be Fasteners workbench. Okay. So to install add ons, we need to go to tools, and over here, we have add on manager. We need to open this. Okay? So simply left click to open it, and it will take a couple of seconds, and it will show all of the available add ons like this. Okay? So currently it is still down connecting itself to the Internet. So it will take a couple of seconds. It will download the icons and other files for all of the add ons appearing over here. Okay. So it will take a couple of seconds. So this basically is your add on library. All of the add ons which are available for installation are available right here are shown right here. And there are a lot of add ons. For example, there is a two plus. It is an add on for creating assemblies, and in the previous versions of RCET before 1.0, the free cat by itself did not had a built in assembly workpen. You had to install a two plus to create assemblies, but now you can do it without installing any add on. But if you still want to use this add on, you can still install it in, use it. Okay? So you have add on for airplane design, animation, and all sorts of things, okay? So you have BM bars, BM tester. This is for architecture, cad exchangers, CFD, CFD OF open, which is open form computational fluid dynamics, and many, many more. Okay? You can also change the layout or the view of this library by clicking on these icons over here. So you can click on this button. So it will be very small icons and that description right next to them or this default view or this list view. Okay. So for example, I'll go back to over here and I will go to the search box and we will type fasteners. Okay. So when you start for fasteners, this fasteners workbench, it appeared, and this is the one we are going to start. Okay. So simply left click on it, and then it will open its detail. So this is basically the GitHub page of this Fasteners workbench add on. Okay? And it shows all of the information about it over here. Who are the developers, and it is basically these two guys and everything else about this workbench. To install it, you simply need to click on this Install butt. Okay? So left click on Install. It will take a couple of seconds, and now it is installed. Okay? And if you want to uninstall an add on which you have already installed, you need to simply once again, go to Tools, open add on Manager, and I will do it over here. Okay. So once you install an add on, you have to restart the freekt software. Okay. So I will just click Restart now. So it closed, and now it is going to restart and here we are. Okay. So now if you want to uninstall or remove an add on which you have already installed, you will have to go to tools, open add on Manager again. Once again, it will take a couple of seconds to load. Okay. And Okay. So I will type fasteners because that is the one we have fasteners, it is installed, and you simply click on that, and instead of installing it, you will have these two options over here. You can either disable it or you can uninstall it. Okay. So you can also remove add ons which you have installed. So I'll just close it, and I will create a new parametric file to use this workbench. Okay? So create a new parametric part file. Then what we will do, we will go over here. And currently for this parametric free cat document, we are in part design workbench. Instead, I will click on it and we will move over to this fasteners Workbench. Now, this workbench was not available before installation of that fasteners Workbench add on. We have installed it, now it is available. So I will simply left click to open. Okay. And now we are in fasteners work pen. And as you can see, over here, instead of those pad and other additive and subtractive features, we have different types of fasteners. You have screws, nuts, bolts, and all other type of fasteners. So these are basically your standard fastener parts. Okay. And you can simply just click on whatever parts you want to be added or you want the model of a specific fastener, you can simply click on that, and it will basically appear in our view pot. Okay? So for example, let's say I go over here and here we have hexagonal nuts. So here we have ISO, which is far from the international standard organization 40 32 hexagonal Nut. So I will simply left click and here we have our hexagonal nut. Okay? So basically, this fastener workbench, it provides you with a repository or a library of different type of standard fasteners. Okay? You can simply just click on this, then save your part. You can simply click on click Save and I can save it as hex Nut. Okay, saved. And now we already have this part without without doing any kind of card modeling, and we can use it in creating assemblies. Okay. There are more features in this fasteners workbench as well, but the gist of it is that you have all of the available almost not all of the most of the standard fasteners available without any modeling. Okay? You have screws like this, so we will have to delete it. So we have these different type of screws this one. Okay. So these are all standard parts. And depending on what you want, you can simply just click on it, and it will be at that model that CAD model of that standard fastener will be created automatically by using this Fasteners Workman. So this was all for this lecture and for this project, and the goal of this project was to learn how to install add ons to expand the functionality of the software. Thank you. 14. Day 9: Part Modelling - Wine Glass: So this is going to be the day nine or the ninth project of this course. And in this lecture, we are going to be creating this glass or goblet, whatever you want to call it. Okay. So we will create this by using a new feature which you have not used in the previous lectures, and that is going to be the additive loft and subtractive loft features. Okay, so let's start creating this. Okay. So I will just close it and before going to creating a file, let's see the dimensions. So this diagram basically or this very rough sketch basically shows the dimensions of this class. Okay? So the portion where the liquid or whatever juice, et cetera is going to be held is this portion, okay. And then we have a stand over here. This is the thickness of 5 millimeters and its radius diameter is 65. Then we have this portion over here up to this point and this portion and this portion. So basically, we have some fillet over here over here and over here as well, between the stand and the actual chamber of the glass. Okay? So let's start creating this. So first of all, obviously, we will have to create a parametric part file and check or system of measurements, and that is millimeters. And we have dimensions in millimeters as well, so we don't need to change anything there. Now, we simply need to go to tasks and create a sketch. And then, as you know, for that sketch, we will have to select a plan, and we will select this X Y or top plan. Okay, because we are going to be creating this geometry from the bottom zone. Okay. So we will create this bass, first of all, and it is circular bass with diameter of 75 millimeters. So let's start creating that. Okay. So I will select the circle tool, and as you know, we have to connect or originate or sketches from the origin. So I'm going to make the center of the circle to be origin. Okay. So let's create it and its diameter is 65. I will just type 65, 65 plus Enter and there we have our circle. Okay. So let's just close it, and this is going to be padded up to this portion. So this entire portion, as you can see, from this point to this point is 5 millimeters, so we can make it like something like 3 millimeters. Okay. So let's the sketch is selected. We can now pad it upwards. I will click on the pad feature over here, and here it is. For the length of this pad, it is going to be 3 millimeters. Type three, press over here, and that is perfect press. Okay. Now we're going to create this portion. Okay? So it is going to be a circle once again, and it's with the diameter of 8 millimeters, and it will be padded upwards using the pad feature up to 45 millimeters. Okay, so let's start creating that. We will select this surface, then click on Create sketch under tasks. So we will create a sketch. And once again, this sketch is going to be a circle once again originating at the origin. Let's do it and its diameter would be at millimeters type at, press, Enter. And there we have our circle. Let's close it, click on the pad feature over here once again to bring it upward, and this is going to be 45 millimeters. Type 45. Okay, and press. Okay. We have a stand for our class. Now we are ready to create the chamber of the class itself. We are going to do that by using the loft feature. Before we do that, let's just see how it actually is going to work and what is going to be the plan. So the loft feature is basically what it does that it connects it connects different sketches created on different plans with one another to create a single three dimensional geometry. Okay. So what we are going to be doing, we are going to be creating one circle over here at the top of this rod that we created, and it is going to be one circle on this phase. Okay. And again, that circle will have eight millimeter diameter. Then this portion of the glass has the diameter of 65 millimeter, and that portion or that 65 millimeter radius is away or above this eight millimeter circle by the distance of 50 millimeters. Okay. So what we're going to do, we're going to be creating, I'll just move to front view. Okay. So here we will have or eight millimeter circle. Then we will create a circle somewhere over here with the radius of 65 millimeters. Okay? And that circle will be 50. Let's see if we just 50, 50 millimeter upwards from the surface, o or the original, the first circle that we created. Okay? And for that, we will have to create a plan. Okay. Then we will create another circle somewhere over here, which is going to be the topmost surface of our glass, and it is going to have the radius of diameter, sorry, 47 millimeters. And from this portion, it is going to be 50 plus 6,110 millimeters away. So basically, we will create one circle over here, 8 millimeters, one circle over here with a diameter of 65 millimeter, and this circle over here. With a diameter of 47 millimeters. Then we will use the loft additive loft feature and it will basically connect these three circles, or it can be any sketch. It has to be closed sketch that is the condition for gas, these are circles. So what loft feature will do, it will connect these three circles and we add material between these circles over here, over here, over here, and throughout this portion between these two as well and between these two dictated by the profile of these circles, creating the overall body of the glass. Okay. So let's do it. Okay. So first circle is going to be here. Okay, so I will select this surface. Click on Create sketch. Let's span a bit, and I will click on the circle tool, and we will create a circle over here. And this is going to be same as the previous circle we created. So that is 8 millimeters. So just type eight and press, close. Okay. Now we do not we cannot just use the log feature right now. We have to create those two other circles as well. Okay, one over here and one over here. But for those circles, we are going to be needing plans. So first, we'll create reference datum plans. Okay. And for that, once again, I will select this surface. Okay. And then instead of clicking on Create sketch, I will click on Create Tatum plan over here. Okay. So left click on that, and it basically creates a plan right on top of that surface. So if I look at it from the front view, it looks something like this. Okay. But we do not need it over here. Okay? We need it how much 50 millimeter above from this portion above from this surface. Okay. And upward is as you can see over here, o over here, it is in Z axis. Okay. So meaning we need to move this plan in z axis by 45 millimeters. Okay. Once again, let's see 45. No, sorry it is 50. Okay? So we need to move this upward by 50 millimeter in that direction. Okay? And we can do that by going over here under attachment offsets, and here it is in z direction. We need to move it in upward z direction. So here I will type 50. Okay. Let's type 50. Click over here somewhere over here to update the view, and now the plan is over here. Okay. That is perfect. So click. Okay. Then we can create sketch on it now, but let's just create the second plan as well, the topmost plan. Once again, I will select this surface. Okay, and click on Create Tatum plan. Once again, let's move to the front view, and this plan is going to be upward in Z direction by 50 plus 60, 110 millimeters. So we will move this in z direction by 110 millimeters. Okay. Click over here to update the view, and now the plan is over here. Click Okay. Now we have our plans, so let's start creating our sketches. Okay. So let's select this plan, click on Create sketch. Once again, it is going to be a circle with its center at origin, and its diameter is going to be 65 millimeters. Okay? So let's create a circle diameter, 65 millimeters. We have our circle, we can simply press close to exit out of the sketcher. So now we have one circle over here and one circle over here. Now, let's create third circle over here as well. Okay. So for additive love to work, there needs to be minimum two sketches like this. Okay? In this case, we have three, but there has to be minimum two sketches. I will now create the third circle, click on this plan, then create sketch, once again, a circle. But this time, it's diameter is 47 millimeters. Okay? So circle starting at the origin with 47 millimeters. Okay, and press. Okay. Now, we are ready to create a loft. We are ready to choose the loft feature. For that, we need to select all of the sketches we need to implement or we want to implement in loft. And that is this circle, this circle, and this circle, and we can select them over here or we can go to model. Okay. So this circle over here is this one, Sketch 002, that is selected, press the control key and hold it. Then we will select this set 003, which is this circle. Then sketch 004, which is this circle. Now we have three circles selected. Now we can go over here and click on this additive loft. Once we click on it, it will create a geometry by combining those three sketches. Okay. So over here, we have two options. Ruled surface and close. This close option, it does not do anything at the moment. Maybe they added it to the software, but maybe it will have some functionality in the future update. Okay, currently, it is useless. It does not do anything, whether you turn it on or off. But this ruled surface, it does make a difference. So if you look at it from the front view, okay? So we had a circle over here, a circle over here, and a circle over here. Okay. It is combining those three circles and it is inserting material between those circles, but it is also creating a smooth or curve geometry. Okay? It is not directly joining this circle to this circle. Instead, it is going in this way, gradually increasing the diameter of circles which are inserted in between these circles. Okay, and it does the same over here in this direction as well. However, if you turn on this ruled surface, this basically forces free cad to use the laugh tool by just connecting the sketches that we created. And if you do it, or sketch looks something like this. Now if you are after this kind of share, you can just use it in this way. Okay? However, I want a curved surface. Okay? So if you turn it on ruled surface, it is going to be creating a sharp geometry directly connecting the different sketches we have selected. But if you turn it off, it will be curved surface, and that is what I'm after for this project. So let's press Okay, and now we have our glass. But if we rotate, and look inside it, there is a problem because it is not empty, we need to make it hollow so that we can put some liquid or other stuff inside it. Okay, so it does not serve the function just like this. So how will we make it hollow? So we can make it hollow by once again doing the same thing, but in opposite direction. Okay? And by opposite direction, I mean, use the lof tool once again, but instead of adding material, we will remove material. Okay. So for that, once again, we will need three sketches. One over here, one over here, and one over here. Okay. But to create a sketch over here, we will need a new plan. Okay, somewhere over here. So for that plan, I will select this surface and we will create a plan with a reference to the surface over here. Okay? So go to tasks after selecting this surface. We will create a datum plan. So this plan is right here. We want it to be over here, and we know this distance is how much it is. It is 45 millimeters. Okay, so we will move it in that direction by 45 millimeters. Okay, now or circle at this plan is at correct position. For the other two sketches, we will use these plans which we created in the previous for the previous loft. So once again, we will select this. I will select this plan. Click on Create a sketch, and we will create one more sketch over here. Okay. So this is going to be once again a circle, but it is going to be a little bit smaller than this circle. Okay? So this original circle was 47 millimeters, and I want the thickness of the glass to be 2 millimeters. Okay? So 47 minus two, that is 45 millimeter. Okay. So this one would be 45 millimeter and press close. Then we will create another circle on this plan. Create sketch. Okay, let's create a circle. Now, we cannot see the origin, and that is a problem because we cannot see it because this plan on which we are creating this sketch right now is inside this geometry. Okay? So let's move to top view, and we will change the view from a is to wireframe. Okay. Now we can see the inside of the geometry as well and we can see the origin. So once again, we will start this circle at the origin, and let's see. Okay. So this was 65 millimeter, this original circle. So once again, 65 minus two. The diameter for this circle would be 63 millimeter because we need to leave some material for the thickness of this glass. Okay? So it is going to be 63 millimeters. Okay, press close. Now we will select this surface, and now as you can see, we are seeing the glass in wireframe view, basically, we can see the inside of the glass. Okay. So now we will select this plan and create sketch. Once again, it will be a circle and this portion is 8 millimeters, so at minus two, this circle would be of diameter, 6 millimeters, create a circle, 6 millimeters, press Okay and press close. Okay. So now we can go to Model tab, and these are the three sketches we have created. This is the topmost circle, sketch 005, sketch 006, this circle, and sketch 007, this circle. Once again, we need to select all of these. And for that, we will have to press the Control key. All three are selected. And what we are going to do now is go to these red colored features which are destructive features, and we are going to be choosing this subtractive loft. Okay. Let's click on that. And as you can see, the color is red, meaning it is going to remove material. And if you look at it at the front view, it is removing this internal material. Okay. Now we can go over here to let's not do it right now. Okay. And for this subtractive laugh, you have the same options over here as well. Rod surface. If you turn it on, it is going to dust just directly connecting the sketch, creating a sharp geometry, and if you turn it off, it will create a curved geometry. Okay. So now let's press Okay. And change the view to as is, it already is an S is. Now if you move up, we can see the glass is hollow from the inside. Okay. So that is what we wanted. Now this portion is empty and this glass can serve its function. Now we don't need these plans. I will just simply click on these plans, press space bar to turn off their visibility. Click on this plan, space bar, this plan, space bar. Okay. Now let's add some filllets over here and over here. I will select the Fillet tool and we will select this edge over here, this circular edge. Okay. And now let's just start increasing this fillet radius over here. So what is the appropriate? You can pick whatever you want. I will keep it at 30 millimeters. Okay, 30 plus. Okay. And now you will also create a filllet over here. Okay, here, and this is going to be let's keep increasing it something like 10 millimeters. Okay. Ten. Okay. So now our glass is basically ready, but let's do one more thing. Okay? This portion over here, these edges are really, really sharp. And if you see real glasses, these are surfaces or these edges are not that sharp. They are somewhat smooth. Okay? So what we will do, we will add some fillets over here on this edge. And this edge. So we will select both of these edges. Okay. And for the radius, it is going to be very, very small. Let's say 0.5 and click over here click over here to see the preview, and that is the preview. So it is not properly working. On the one side is getting filleted, so we have to go by even smaller number. So 0.25, let's Okay. Now, that is really, really good. We have curved surface over here and curved edge over here. Spresso and here. We have a glass ready. We can just Control S, and I'll just save it as wine glass. Okay. So I'll just replace it on the previously created file. So this is all for this lecture, and in this lecture, we learned how to use additive loft and subtractive loft. In the next lecture, we will create a Zou shaped pipe. Thank you. 15. Day 10: Part Modelling - U-Shaped Pipe: So in this lecture, we are going to be creating a zoo shaped pipe, and it is going to look something like this. So this is our tenth project for CAD modeling in free cat. So this is the pipe we are going to be modeling. Okay? It is going to be zu shaped like this. It's the distance between opening and end is going to be 120 millimeters and it will go straight upward, then there will be an arc over here and then downward once again. The distance from the start this point after which this arc starts. After this arc portion is going to be 100 millimeters. Okay? And the radius of this arc is going to be 60 millimeters. Okay? So Ora diameter is going to be 25 NR is going to be 22 millimeter, meaning the thickness is going to be 3 millimeters. Okay. And we will create this by using the sweep feature. Okay? Not the sweep feature in other software, it is called Sweep, but in FreeCAD, it is named as additive pipe. Okay? So for this, we're going to be requiring two sketches. The first sketch is going to be called profile and the second sketch is going to be called path. And this additive pipe will sweep that profile through a path, creating a three dimensional geometry. So in this case, our circle over here with the diameter of 25 millimeter is going to be the profile. Then we will create the path of this pipe, and that would be our second sketch. And then we will use additive pipe feature. So let's start creating it. Okay. So dimensions are in millimeters, meaning system of unit is going to be in millimeters. So first of all, let's create a parametric part file and click on Create sketch. Okay? So first, we'll create the profile and obviously this pipe will be over here, then it will go upward and in this direction then downward again. So this profile, this circle over here would be created on the top plane or X Y plan. Okay, so I will select XY plan. And select the circle tool to create a circle starting at the origin. And its diameter is, as we know, 25 millimeter because that is the outer diameter of the pipe. Okay? So let's close. Okay. So now instead of creating or applying any feature on this sketch, we are going to be creating a new sketch. Okay? And that sketch would be the path. So let's create it. Instead of clicking on any one of these features, like we have been doing to this point, I will once again click on this create Sketch button. Okay. So once again, we will have to select a plan. And as you can see, if this is mad on top plan, the path will be created in front plan. Okay. So this is top plan, the path would be in this plan, X Z plan. So let's click on that here. Okay. So now, as you know, we created this circle, which is the profile sketch, and that profile sketch origin, its center was at origin. Okay? So now we will begin our path at the origin from the origin as well. Okay? The basic condition for additive loft is that the two sketches, the path and the the path and the profile, there have to be there needs to be one common point between them. Okay? So this origin, as you know, it is the center of this circle, the profile sketch. So our path will begin at this origin as well, which will make the origin or this single same point between two sketches. So first of all, we will create a line going upward from this origin with the length of 100 millimeters. Okay. So let's do it. So click on the line tool and we will start a line at the origin. Its length is going to be 100 millimeters. So type its length, press Enter, then angle and angle is going to be 90 degree because this line is going to be perfectly vertical line. So press Okay. Then for right now, I will not create this arc. I'll create a single straight line over here to here and then going downward because that will show the features or different options inside this additive byte feature, much more. After that, we will delete it and create this arc as well. Okay. So I will just create a line over here with the length of how much is it 120 millimeters, so 120 millimeters, zero degree angle. Okay. Then a line over here. Going in downward direction, once again, 100 millimeters, equal to the first line that we created, and once again, it would be perfectly vertical, but in opposite direction, downward direction, so -90 degree angle, press enter. So this is going to be our path for momentarily. Okay, so let's close it. Okay, let's zoom out a bit. And here, this sketch is going to be our profile sketch. This sketch is going to be our path sketch. And now we can use the additive pipe feature, which is over here, right next to the additive loft feature, which we used in the previous lecture. Okay. So let's click on this additive Pipe. Okay, so we need to select a certain sketch, and it has two valid sketches sketch and sketch 00, one. Okay. Now the first sketch we select is going to be the profile. And our profile sketch is this circle. So we can just click on circle over here or we can select this sketch over here as well. So let's just click on this circle. Okay? The first sketch selected in additive pipe is the profile sketch. So I will select this now as you can see, everything here changes. The parameters have changed. Okay. And under profile, if you see over here, this is called let me zoom in. So profile, we have this sketch that we selected. Under here, we need to select path to sweep o. We need to select the path sketch. And for that path sketch, I will click on this object button and you can click on any one of these lines. So let's just click on this line. Okay. So once I selected, this sketch 001 became the path. Okay. And this is the preview of our sweep. So this is the kind of geometry it is going to create. So as you can see, it is taking this circle, moving it in the upward direction along this path and then moving in this direction along this path and then moving it downward. Okay. So it is creating this kind of geometry. Okay. Now, you should see over here, we have this option called corner transition. By default, it is going to be untransformed, meaning it is going to take the orientation of the profile sketch, and it will keep that orientation consistent and will move it along the entire path. Okay. That is why up to this point, it is creating three D cylinder, and after that, it is basically creating a plan from this point to this point, two dimensional surface. Okay. However, if you change the configuration for this coordinate transition from transform to right corner. Okay? Now, it is creating right corner, meaning it is taking this profile, circular profile upward, then moving it up to this point, moving it over here, rotating it at 45 degrees, then moving it over here to this point and then downward. Okay? So if you want this kind of pipe, you can create it by keeping this coordinate transition to right corner. And you also have round corner. Okay. This is basically the same thing, but it is going to make this corner round. And over here as well. But I created this strat line just to show these three different options because if I created this arc over here, these three different options would not have mated. Okay. But that is not how our pipe looks like. Okay. So I will just cancel it, go to model, double click on this get 001, which is the path sketch, and we will modify it. Okay. So I will select the arc tool over here. And as you know, the first point is going to be the center of the arc and the center of the arc is going to be the midpoint of this line. Okay, so just move it along and it will snap to its center right here. Okay. Then we will need to select the radius of the arc, which is going to be 60 millimeters. And that is because the distance between this circle, this starting point and end point of the pipe is 120. So this arc radius is going to be half of that. That is 60 millimeters. So 60. Okay. So it will start at this point over here, move in this direction and at this point. Okay, so that is our arc. Now, I will click on this line. We no longer need it, so just delete. Okay, close and now we have our modified sketch. Okay. So now we can click on this additive path once again, additive pipe, sorry, once again, and we will select this circle to be or profile. And for the path, it is going to be this profile. Okay. So now, as you can see, it is creating the pipe along that path. So whatever the path is, if it is something like this zig zag, it will continue to carry it create three geometry. Along that path irrespective of the profile of the bar. Now if I change for this case as there are no sharp corners. So if I change these things to right corner, round corner or transform, nothing really happens. Okay, because there are no sharp turns in the sketch in the path. You can simply click Okay, and we have our pipe. But once again, it is not hollow. So how will we make it hollow? To make it hollow, we basically have two options. We can just do what we did with the glass, and that was using the same feature. But instead of additive, that being subtractive, and that is over here. Subtractive pipe. We can once again create a smaller circle over here with the diameter of internal diameter which is 22 millimeter, create the path again and then use subtractive pipe. However, that is going to take a bit more time creating this circle over here and then creating the path. Instead, what we can do, we can use a new feature, which is over here. It is called thickness feature, and it says, max a thick solid. Okay? So if I click on this, and then if I click on this surface, okay. So what it is going to do, it asks for thickness over here, which is 1 millimeter. Okay. And for or pipe, the thickness is 25 -22 3 millimeters. So instead of one here, I will type three for the thickness. And what it is going to do, it is going to make this remove material from this surface that we have selected, and it will leave some thickness over here, whatever we enter over here, and it will basically, as you can see, remove material throughout this plan this geometry as well, making the geometry hollow. Okay? Now, we also want to remove material from this one. This has to be an open end as well. Okay. So while choosing this thickness feature, all of the ends you want to leave open, you will have to select it over here. So I will click on this select. This phase one is already selected, so I will also select this phase. Now under selected phases, we have phase one and phase five. Now, if I click on the preview, our pipe becomes hollow. We have removed material over here and material over here and throughout this geometry as well. Okay. And underneath, you have these options skin pipe wrecked over an arc and intersection as well. But this version, the free cat 1.0 in this variant don't do anything at all. Even if you change it, as you can see, nothing really happens. So maybe the different features are added to FreeCAD in the later version, and when that happens, I will update this lecture as well. Okay or I will just add a new lecture where I will basically explain all of the changes made in a newer version of freak. So just press Okay, and our zoo shaped pipe is ready. Okay. So now our pipe is ready. I will just save it. Let's just call it. Pipe. Okay. And now, there must be a question rising in your mind, and that is not about pipe, but about this glass we created in the previous lecture. Okay. So if you remember, we made this glass from the inside. We made it hollow by using the what was it? Subtractive loft feature. Okay. So now you must be thinking why we did not use the thickness feature over here. Okay? So the explanation to that is very simple because if we had used the thickness feature while creating this glass, it would not have removed material from this top portion only. Okay? So with subtractive loft that we have used for this class, it removes material from this point. To this point only. Okay? This portion is not hollow. This stand is not hollow. This portion is not hollow. But instead of using the subtractive loft loft which we have used, if you had used the thickness feature while creating this glass, it would have removed material all the way to this point to this point as well. Okay? So it would have made the entire geometry hollow from the inside. Okay, leaving the thickness variable, whatever we enter. Okay. And that is not how glasses look like. Okay, if you want to go for that shape, you can choose the thickness feature for creating the glasses as well. Okay. So the thickness feature basically removes material throughout the entire geometry. Okay, it makes it removes intern material throughout the entire geometry, and sometimes you don't want that. Okay? So for that case, you cannot use the thickness feature, but for the pipe that we created in this lecture, it was hollow all throughout. Okay? So for that, we can use the thickness feature. So once again, this was all for this lecture. Thank you. 16. Day 11: Part Modelling - Nameplate: Hi, welcome to the 11th project of this course. And in this lecture, we are going to be creating this nameplate. The basic goal of this exercise or this project is to learn how to create three dimensional geometries from texts, as well as create logos or create some drawings on the basis of a reference image. And we're going to try to create this free card logo over here by using the picture of freakad logo, basically. So this is what we are going to create. So I will just close this file, and like always, we will create a new parametric part file. Click on Create sketch, and for this sketch, I'm going to be creating this sketch on this ZD or front plan. So basically, this name plate is going to be intended to be attached to the wall, et cetera, in an office or any other place. Okay. So I will select on this plan. And it is simply going to be a rectangle. Okay. So I will select a rectangle tool, create a rectangle like this, and for its length, I will keep it as 80 and for its height. Basically, we can keep it at what should it be 100. Okay? So it is this kind of a rectangle. So we can simply press close our sketch is ready for our plate and we only need to apply a pad feature on it. Okay? And for the pad, I will just keep the length to be 3 millimeters. Okay, and press Okay. So now we have our plate. Now, if you want to, you can apply some fillets on these corners as well, or that's just store this corner, this corner, this corner and let's zoom out a bit and this corner. Here we are. Let's turn down the preview by clicking this pattern and let's increase the radius, something like 5 millimeters. That looks very good. Les Okay. So now we have our play. Now what we need to do, we need to insert our text on top of it. Okay. And you cannot directly click on If we just click on this face and click on Create sketch, it will take us to the sketcher workbench, but unfortunately, there are no text option available here. Okay? So we cannot create a sketch by just clicking on a surface and creating any text, basically, o in sketcher workbench. We need to close it. And what we need to do, we need to go over here on these workbenches and we need to go to this workbench, which is draft workbench. And as the name suggests, this workbench is used for drafting like creating drawings, et cetera. So this is the draft workbench. And once you do it, once you enter the draft work peng, you will see this canvas over here. So this basically 110 millimeter over here, ten that the scale is written over here. So this is basically the canvas. And you can create, as you can see, over here, lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, so much more, text, and so many other options. And you can use those options to create. You can use those tools to create drawings on this canvas. Okay. But the option we are interested in for this project is this one. Shape from text. And as the name suggests, it can create a shape from a text, basically. Okay. So I will click on it, and this is the option. These are the parameters for this text. Okay, so we need to first write the text, and this text is going to be only in X and Y direction, meaning on this canvas because this canvas is on XY plane, so the text will be in X plan as well. Okay. So if you hover over here, okay, you can see that these numbers are changing. Okay? For example, if I move over here, now it is 64 minus now it is 1.85 and -69 in xs. So these are the coordinates of the starting point for our text. So let's say, so it doesn't really matter if I write the text over here, over here or over here because we need to create a shap from this text, and we will eventually have to move it from wherever the text is to put it on this surface along this surface. Okay. So let's say I click on this position. You can click on click wherever you like. Okay. So these coordinates doesn't really matter for this project, so I will click over here. So this is going to be the starting point or the location where the text is going to be written. And these are its coordinates. Okay. Next over here, we have string. So string basically is what the text is going to be. By default, it is going to just say default, so I will change it and I will change it to my name Omer. Okay, you can write jour name if you want, or whatever you want to write, it doesn't really matter. Then you have the height of the text, and I'm just going to keep it at 10 millimeters, you can change it as well. Like let's say 12. Now as you can see that there is no preview available over here. And that is one of the limitation of this shape to feature text to shape feature in free care. Okay. Finally, you have this button over here? And it says font file. So you basically have to select the font select the font file, which is going to be used for writing this text. Okay. And you can just do that by clicking on this button. Okay? And if you are on Windows, which I am on Windows, you will go to my computer. C or the disk where your Windows is installed, go to Windows, and then there would be a folder over here called fonts, this one. Okay? So open there, and it will have all of the fonts installed in your computer, and you can select whichever fonts you like. So I'm going to select where it is. There is a font that I really like, and it is called century. Okay. So I'll select this century. Click Okay. Now, if you are on Mac, Okay, so let me see here. So if you are on Mac, the location for your fonts would be system, library, and then a folder called fonts, and you can select all of the fonts over there. Okay. So that would be the procedure for MAC Okay. So let's minimize that. Here we are. So right now, I've selected the font file. I've selected the height, its position, and also what that text is going to be. So I can simply click. Okay. And once I did that, you can see the text is over here. Okay. So now we are done for we have done what we needed to do in this draft workbench. Now what we can do, we can simply click on this draft workbench manual over here. It is over here and once again, move to part design workbench. So let's go back. Now we are back in Part Design Wpench and we have all of these features available over here. Okay. So first of all, we need to go to model to see the design tree, and over here, you can see we have this thing over here, this component called Shap string. This is basically this text. Okay? So first of all, what we need to do we need to pick this shap string and put it on top of this body. Okay, this body is our blade. Okay? So this is going to do? It is going to create this or move this shape or which is actually this text, and it'll make it a subcomponent of this geometry. Okay? So now it is a subcomponent of this geometry. Okay. So now we need to position it in its proper position along this plat. Okay? And for that, we are going to learn how to transform components in design part design workpag. Okay. So simply just select any one of these letters, any component or text, right click and you will have this option available to you called transform. Okay, so left click on that, and this will make these arrows and these circles are basically available to you. So you can move your components along z axis by moving this green green arrow, red axis will move it along X xis and blue arrow. Sorry, red arrow will move it along Xxs and blue arrow will move it along via z axis. Okay. And similarly, you can use these circles over here to rot at it as well. If you click on this red, for example, if you click on this blue, circle and move around. I will rotate the text around Z axis. And this transform options, these tools are they're not only for text, basically. You can move any kind of other objects as well. For example, if I want to move this plat, I can simply click on this plat, first close out of this transform tool, right click on this plat, transform and I can move this plat as well if I want. Okay. So right now, we need to move this text. So let's select it, right, transform, and we need to align it along this surface, meaning we need to rotate it by 90 degrees along x axis. Okay. And you can do it by moving this red circle like this, or you can insert the rotation increment over here as well. So for example, right now it is set to 90 degrees, meaning these circles will these circles or these arcs, they will rotate the component, which is this text, but in 90 degrees. So for example, if I change this rotation increment to say something like 45 degrees. Okay. So now it is 45. Now if I use this circle once again to rotate, now it is rotating it by 45 degrees. So right now, this text is at 45 degrees, then move it once again. Now it is at 90 degree. So we want it to be 90 degree, so that is perfectly fine. Now let's move it backward a bit. Move it inside this plate but not too much inside. Let's say something like here. So it is now a little bit inside, like a very small amount over here. Okay. So then you can move to front view, and now you cannot see the text for that, which you can do, let's move to this let's change the view in the view pod to wireframe, and now we can see the text. So now we need to position it at its perfect appropriate position on this nam plate. So move it left a bit by using this red arrow, and then we will move it upward to this position by using this green arrow. Now it is in its appropriate position. Okay. So let's close it. And similarly, one more thing, you can also set the increment of translation as well, which currently it is at 1 millimeter, meaning if I move this arrow with each drag of the mouse, it will move this component by 1 millimeter. You can change it as well. For example, if I make it, let's say, five, if I move it, it is moving by 5 millimeters with each rag of the mouse. Here. Let's press. Change the view back to as is, Okay. So now we cannot see the text, but the text is somewhere inside, and from this angle, we can see. Now we can simply select this shap string, and now we are able to use all of these features. And the feature which we are going to be using is going to be this pad feature. Okay because we want to create three dimensional geometry on the basis of this text. So this text is going to serve as our sketch. So let's click on pad, and as you can see, it is padding it in upward direction. Once again, we can select its length. Let's say three millimeter, that is a bit too much. So 1 millimeter, that I think is really, really good. So let's press Okay. And now we have text. Now we have learned how to create geometries on the basis of text. Okay. So now let's try to create the logo over here. And for the logo, I have this image of the free card logo. Okay. So this image is going to serve as the reference file or the reference sketch or reference image basically for our sketch, and we are going to put this image over here. Okay. And then we will create sketch by tracing all of these lines on top of this image of free card logo. Okay. So let's see how we can do it. To insert a reference image, you basically have to go to file and click on Import. Or you can simply press Control I. So let's do it. I will go to Desktop and fricat. So I will provide this image, frec logo image along with its lecture, you will find it attached in the resource files. And I will also attach a couple of files a couple of font files as well if you want to. Okay, if you want to use them. So let's add this Okay. So now, logo is there, but there are a lot of problems. Firstly, it is not in its perfect orientation. It is not in its proper position, and also it is not in its proper size. It is way too big. Okay. So we need to adjust all of those things. So first of all, you can see over here we have this free cad which is this image, basically. Okay? So right click. So first select it, sorry, left click to select, then right click and click on Transform. So once again, we need to align it along this plate. So we will move it by 90 degrees in we need to move it in 90 degrees along X axis. So meaning this red arc over here. So let's click on this red circle and move it like this. Okay. So with each drag of the mouse, it rotated the image by 45 degrees. And once we moved, uh, once we move a bit, so we need to first, okay. So now it is at 45 and now it is over here at 90. So the orientation is now correct. Okay? So let's go to front view. Okay. And first turn on the Wireframe view by clicking on this button, click on Wireframe. Okay. So let's press Okay. Now we need to scale this model down a bit. Okay, we need to make this a bit smaller. Like it fits over here on this portion of our play. For that, you simply need to select this image over here and over here, you have X size and Y size, which is basically it's length and height of this image. So what I'm going to do, I'm going to reduce this image, reduce the size of this image in both X and Y direction by 100 millimeters. Okay. So firstly, it is to 70.90. So this one, I will make it 170.90. Okay. And for this one, it is 325.13, I will make it 225.13. Okay. So now let's see. It is still a lot big. It is still very, very big. So let's -100 more. So let's make it 70 and let's make it 125. It's still really, really big. So let's make this one as 80. Okay. Now it seems to be of perfect size. So once again, select them out the image by left click, then right click, click on Transform and move it to it proper position somewhere over here. Now, as you can see, it is still very big. So let's bring it down a bit. So Xize make it 50 and Y size make it 60. Now it is appropriate. It is of the appropriate size. So I will once again, I will select it, right click, transform, and move it down a bit somewhere over here. Okay? Now this seems to be the perfect position. So now we need to stay in wireframe view. Now what I'm going to do. What I'm going to do, I'm going to select this surface, this surface of this plate, and let's see what the surface is. It is this surface, obviously. So we will select this surface and click on task and create a sketch. Okay. So now we don't we cannot see the image, and that is because that freak logo image is behind this plat. So once again, I will change it to Wireframe view, and here it is. So now what we need to do, we simply need to create the sketch by tracing this image. So I will use the line to start a line over here and press tab and set the angle because we know the angle angle is going to be 90 degree and we are not so sure about the length, so I will extend it up to this point. So we have a line over here, then create another line from this point to this point, then from this point to this point, let's send the angle to zero. Okay. Here. And to change the angle but not the length, what you need to do, for example, if I create a line, it is first asking me for the length. But if you don't want to insert the length, but you only want to insert the angle, simply press the tail key, and it will move over to the angle. And the angle this time is going to be -90, type -90, and then you can move around to change the length arbitrarily, whereas it's angle is going to be fixed. So up to this point, then create another line from there to here, then this line then this line. I'm just going to make these lines rather quickly. Then this line if you want to create a real proper model, you can set the exact angles, et cetera, as well. Basically, we are dressing the sketch on top of an image, so you will only do it if you don't have appropriate dimensions. Then let's just connect these two lines. Then we can create this F as well. Here, here, one line over here, then this line then this line, so this line is not really perfect. This line is not vertical, but let's just move on. I will make it vertical by using constraints like this in this. Let's select this line, this line, this line, this line, and this line. Let's see, they are not selected this line, this line, this and this. All of these lines are selected and these are all perfectly horizontal lines. I will go over here and make them. Horizontal. Click on this button, click on Constrain horizontal, and now those lines are perfectly horizontal. Let's make this line perfectly vertical, select this line, click on this option and make it constrain vertical. This line, once again, it is already vertical because we can see this symbol over here, and this line it is also already vertical. Okay. So next what we can do, we can select this sketch fillle tool, which is this tool. Okay, and create some curved surfaces over here. So I will have to select this line and this line, and it will create this fillet over here in the sketch. Okay. And you can change the profile of it by moving these handles. Okay. So similarly, I will select this fillet tool once again, sketch Fillet once again, and create a fillt over here as well. Then I will select this line and this line. So that portion is smoothed out a bit, then this line and this line. This edge is now also smooth this and this, this is smooth as well. Over here as well. Then over here, move down a bit over here and then move over here. Then these two lines to create this edge, then this edge is going to be filleted then select this line, this line, so it will make this portion over here rounded. Then we will select this line and this line, and it will make this portion. Rounded a bit. Okay, so let's press close, and we have our sketch. Now what we can do, let's change the view back to as is not as is to flat lines, like this. And as you can see, we have our sketch. So now let's go to model. It is this sketch, sketch 002, click on pad, and we can move it in upward direction to create a three dimensional geometry. So it is going to be 1 millimeter Okay, and press. Okay. So here it is, we have our NAM play and basically we created the three dimensional logo. Or basically we created a sketch by using a reference image. Now if you want to add more detail what you can do, you can select this surface, click on task, create sketch, and that reference image is still going to be there. So for example, if I now change the view to reframe, that reference image is still there, and now what you can do, you can create these portions as well if you want to. So over here, this line and this line, so maybe extrude this portion a bit and this portion a bit as well. Let's just do it. Over here to here, then create a line here. Then this line, then horizontal line over here, then this and then join this over here, and then create the same thing over here as well. This point to this point, then this it would have been a better idea to create some reference geometries from the previously created lines, but let's just move on. Like this. Press close, change the view again to flat lines. It is not changed. Okay. So flat lines here. Click on go to model, click on this new sketch, which is these three arrows type of images, click on pad once again and let's pad them 0.5 half a millimeter and press. Okay. So we have these things over here as well. This is how you can create sketches from reference images. That was all for this lecture. And in this lecture, we learned how to create shapes, three dimensional geometries from text, as well as from reference image. Thank you. 17. Day 12: Part Modelling - Spring: So this is going to be the 11th day or 11th project of our course in free kat. And in this lecture, we are going to be learning how to create springs and also threads, basically. So basically, we're going to be learning two features which are additive helix and subtractive helix. Additive helix would work for creation of springs, and you can use the subtractive helix for creating threads, basically. Okay. So let's create a new parametric part file. Okay. And I will just click on Create sketch. Okay. So for how this additive and subtractive helix, they work, they take a sketch, for example, if I create a sketch on this front plan, so I will move it to the front plan. Okay. So let's say we have a circle over here. Okay. And if we create that circle, we only have to create that circle. We can create it over here, over here, over here anywhere. Okay. And then it is going to create a helical sweep basically automatically. So this additive helix or subtractive helix, it kind of works like the additive pipe and subtractive pipe feature. So in pipe feature, we had a circle or any other profile, basically, you had two sketches. The first sketch was the profile and the second sketch was the path. And it basically moved that sketch, move that profile sketch through the path sketch. Okay, so this time, we will only have to create for additive helix or subtractive helix, you will only have to create the profile. Okay. And automatically, it will create a helical path for us and we employ the additive helix feature. Okay. So for example, if I select this Z plan, the front plan, it is selected, and let's say I create a circle over here. Okay. This tool is basically used for creating springs. So there is some methodology that is specific to creating springs, and that goes along with this additive helix as well. Okay. So first of all, you will create a circle on this horizontal line somewhere over here. Okay. And whatever diameter right now we put to this circle, it is going to be the diameter of the wire. Okay? Or another word, it is going to be the wire thickness of the spring. So let's say I say 3 millimeters. Okay? Here it is. Next, we need to assign distance and Algalcon this dimension tool, which is over here and Algalcon this center, which is the origin to the center of this circle. We need to assign this distance. So what this distance is going to be this distance is going to be the radius of the spring. So spring will go up like this in a spiral or helical shape, and it is obviously going to have some radius. So the distance between the original circle which whose diameter is going to be the thickness and the distance from that circle to the origin is going to be the radius of that spring. Okay. So let's say I type ten millimeter. Okay. So ten millimeter press Okay, the circle is moved over here, and that is all we need. We we don't need to create anymore sketches. Now this sketch is selected. We can go over here and it is this one. Additive helix right next to additive pipe. Okay. So I will click on that. And it automatically creates a spring structure for us. So basically, it is taking this circle over here and then automatically creating for us a spiral or helical path sketch and then basically employing the same old pipe feature which we used in previous couple of lectures. Okay. So to create this sketch, you have certain options. So first of all, you can select the axis. So currently it is vertical axis, meaning create this spring along vertical axis. If I change it to let's say horizontal. So let's make it. Horizontal sketch axis, nothing really happens because this is right over here, and if you create a sketch along horizontal axis, it is not going to created. Okay. So you can change other axis as well. But the way the only axis along which it makes some sense is the vertical upward axis. Okay. So we have created this geometry along with Y axis, but be careful while changing these axises because sometimes, so for example, right now, I changed a lot of axis around which the spring has to be made, and sometimes the calculations become very messy for frica to evaluate and it freak may or may not crash. So I will once again change it to vertical sketch axis. And we have this spring. Then we have some mode over here, and you have a lot of modes. You have pitch height, angle, pitch turns, angle, height turns and angles, and height turns and growth. So it is basically the variation of inputs you want to enter, you can enter for creation of your spring. So for example, if I keep it at pitch height and angle, it is asking me three things pitch height and con angle. Okay. So first of all, let's talk about what these things are. Pitch is the distance or the gap between two consecutive loops, or the distance between same point on two consecutive loops. For example, if we take this point over here, right over here, okay, a point, then the pitch is going to be the distance between this point and the similar point on the next consecutive. Loop over here. So it is going to be this distance. And as you can see, right now, this distance is 4.67 millimeters. So if I let's say increase it, that this distance between two consecutive loops is going to increase. So I set the page to 8 millimeters. Let's click over here to update the view. And as you can see, this distance increased. Okay. Previously, there was another loop over here as well. Now it is deleted, because it had to ensure the distance between two similar points on two consecutive loops to be eight millimeter. Next, you have height and height as the name suggests, it is going to be the height of the spring. Currently, it is 80, sorry, 14 millimeters. Let's say if I change it to something like 50. Okay? And click over here to up. Now the spring is from this point, it is up to 50 millimeter. If you want a longer or a taller spring, you can increase this height as well. Okay. Then you have the cone angle. So currently, as you can see, it is simple flat spring, okay? Meaning it is not conical. However, if you want to create a spring which is conical in shape, you can also increase this angle over here as well. For example, if I change it to 30 degrees and click over here, and it will update in a couple of seconds. So it is basically doing the calculations to create. So creating springs using this additive helix tool is quite resource intensive on the computer. Right now, as you can see, we have a spring which is conical. It is in a cone shape, and the angle of that cone is 30 degrees. Okay. So if you want a conical shape, you can enter the angle of that cone over here as well. But I just want a normal, simple spring, so I will once again return it to zero. And once again, it will create simple, normal spring. So this was pitch height angle mode, basically. It was asking for pitch, height and angle. You can insert the parameters in different combinations as well. You can insert it in pitch, turns and angle. In this case, the pitch and angle is same instead of, it will take a couple of seconds to evaluate now. We have pitch, we have angle, but instead of height, we have tons. Okay. And that is the number of tons we want or number of revolutions we want in this spring. So starting from this and going over here, this would be one term. Then this would be another turn, then another ton. So currently it is 6.25, meaning six tons and a quarter ton more, which is this one over here. So let's say if I type five tons and click over here. Now you only have five tons. As you can count them as well. One, two, three, four and five. Okay. Other combination is height, tons and angle. In this case, you will select the height and up to that certain height, how many number of tons you want and the angle if you want con. So currently, the spring is up to 40 millimeter, and let's say up to that 40 millimeter, I want the spring to have, how much tons three tons. Okay. So be careful trying to put a very large number like 40 or 50 in there. It is going to crash the software because that kind of spring is not possible. It is not possible to create a spring which has the length or height of 40 millimeter and has 60 or 100 tons. Okay? It is going to be very, very difficult. So be mindful about what numbers you are putting over here. Okay. Then you have height, tons and growth. Okay. So this is this only changes the growth over here. So instead of inserting the angle for conical shape, you are inserting growth, and it is a number or the growth of helix radius per term. Okay. So currently it is set to zero. For example, if I make it one or let's make it 2 millimeters. Okay. So this would mean that with each additional turn, it would increase the diameter, sorry, the radius of the spring by 2 millimeters. So initially, this one we created ourselves, and I think it was five millimeter or eight. So for the next turn, it would add two to that radius. Then for that next t, it would add two once more to the radius of that spring creating a conical shape like this. Okay. Now you have some more options for your spring over here as well. Okay? So one is this left handed. So if you turn it on, it is going to change the direction of the spring. Okay? Like this here. Okay. So currently, we have the starting circ phase over here, which is facing us right now, and it is the ending phase is in the opposite direction. If you click on left handed, turn it on, and it is going to switch those two faces. Okay. Another option over here is reversed, and it is basically going to flip the spring. Okay? Or move it in reverse direction. So once everything is set and you have entered all of the required parameters, you can simply press Okay, and you have your geometry for spring. Okay. Now you can also use the opposite of this feature, the additive helix, which is the opposite of it is going to be subtractive helix. And that is, as you know, is going to remove material by carrying out the same procedure. Okay. So how that goes, let's just see. Okay? So I will just close it. Okay, and create a new parametric part file, create a drawing, and I will create a cylinder, basically. Okay? Cylinder. So let's see I will create a circle. Let's make its diameter to be how much it should be. It should be 20. Okay. Press close, click on pad, and I will pad it up to 50 millimeters. Okay? So here we have our cylinder. Now we are going to remove material from the surface of the cylinder in spiral manner. Okay. Sorry, helical share. Okay. So I will go over here, click on this body. It is selected. Now we can go to task and create another sketch inside this quanty. Okay? So click on Create sketch, and this time we will be selecting this X Z plan. Okay. So let's select that. So we will need some reference lines or let's just create a circle over here. Okay? Somewhere over here. Or let's just press a sketch. I will create a reference line using this line. I will click Create external geometry and select this line. Okay. Now we'll select the circle tool and let's create a circle here. Okay. And the diameter, let's make it something like 5 millimeters. Okay, let's press close, and now we're going to remove material on the basis of this circle. Okay. So for example, let's say if I select this circle and click on additive helix. Okay. And as you can see, it is creating a spring like we did in the previous when we created the spring. So it is basically creating a spring on top of that. Cylinder. However, if we do the opposite, we select this circle and use this feature over here called subtractive helix. So let's select that Okay. So now as you can see, it is going to remove material in helical shape. Okay so let's move to front view. And wherever there we have this red color material is going to be removed. Okay? So the height of this cylinder was 50 millimeters, so I will just type the height to be 50 plus o, and now it is up to this point, and then we can adjust pitch, et cetera, as well. So let's just increase the pit to something like ten, let's see. Okay. So that is it. Let's press Okay. And we have this kind of chef. So you can basically create threads using subtractive helix feature. Okay. So this is all for this lecture, and in this lecture, you basically learn how to create threads using subtractive helix feature and springs using additive helix feature. Thank you. 18. Day 13: Part Modelling - Screw Driver: So welcome to the 13th lecture of this course. And in this project, we are going to be creating this screwdriver. And the key feature we are going to discuss or learn in this project is going to be creating multi body parts. So up to this point, we have been creating cared models with only one singular bodies. Whether it was a heat sink, a glass, there was only single one body. Of the time, the products you are going to be modeling are going to contain more than one parts. Okay? So for example, if you look at this, let's say, here, this assembly. Okay? So for example, over here, this is one part or this is another part, this is another part, and there are a lot of parts. Okay. There is one part over here and one over here as well. So your model, and over here, you can see all of the individual parts as well. So your CAD model or the products you're trying to be creating is going to be composed of many different parts. So when you're creating care models which have more than one part, these multi body parts, there can be two approaches. When there is mechanisms, for example, over here, there's going to be a mechanism which is going to be used to move this arm. When there is this kind of mechanism, there is rotation between two or more than two parts in a card model in a product, then you will create every single part individually and then you will create assembly. We will learn about assemblies in a future lecture. Okay. So that is one option. Okay. However, when you are creating multi body parts or models with more than one part, where both of the parts are stationary, they're not moving. For example, I will close that for example in the case of the screwdriver. Here we have this handle and we have this internal screw driver itself. Okay. So here, both of these parts, these are two different parts, two different bodies, but they are not moving. There is no mechanism. If there is ratchet mechanism over here in the screwdriver, then yes, then for that, you will have to create an assembly. But if there is no motion, then you can just directly create multi body parts directly in free kat without creating an assembly. In this lecture, we are going to learn that. Okay. So I will just close it, and I'll just create a new parametric part file, sick the Mud system to standard, meaning in millimeter because over here, I have the dimensions, and let's just okay where are the dimensions here. So I have the dimensions, and the dimensions are going to be in millimeters. Okay. So Okay, here it is. Dimensions are in millimeter. Okay. So one dimension which I forgot to write, it is going to be this dimension. So this region, the length of the screw driver, this thing is going to be 140 millimeters. Okay. So this is the screw driver we are going to be creating. There are going to be two different parties, the handle and the screw driver itself. Okay. So first, we'll create the handle and then we will create inside that handle, we will create this screw driver. So let's go over to free care. We have selected our Mumt system, then click on Create Body and click on Create sketch. So first, we'll be creating the handle. So for that, let's think of the approach. So it is a spherical or not spherical around kind of cylindrical kind of geometry. So the proper approach to creating this kind of model would be creating it using revolution tool, creating the half set sketch, for example, here, this portion and then going this curve portion, we will create it using spine and then this portion over here, and then this line and this line. Okay? And then revolving it around 360 degrees, we will get the model of the handle of this screw driver. Okay. So let's do it. So let's select the front plan. Okay. So first of all, what I will do, I will create a line, vertical line, and it is going to be this portion. Its height is 20 millimeter. Okay? So a vertical line length of 20 millimeters, type 20 press enter angle would be 90, right 90 press enter. Then one line over here, it would be horizontal line. This portion over here is four millimeter and for evolution, as you know, we have to create the half sketch, this would be two millimeter line. We will create a two millimeter horizontal line over here. Length two millimeter angle zero because that line is going to be perfectly horizontal. Then this hole in which the screw driver is going to be inserted, the dimension of the screw drivers are five millimeter, so let's make that hole as five millimeter as well so that the screw driver in that hole is tightly inserted or tightly fixed. So we will create another line over here. At the top end of this first vertical line that we created, and this is five, so half a five is going to be 2.5. So the length for this line is going to be 2.5 millimeter and angle once again would be zero degrees. Okay. Then you will create a vertical line going upwards from this point to this point. So now the entire height of this model, this handle is 90 millimeter and 20 millimeter is the portion over here, and we are currently at this point. So from here to here would be 90 -20. That is 70 millimeters. So this line would be 70 millimeters long. Okay. So let's create it. Let's create a line over here. Length would be 70 angle would be 90 and press. Okay. Then zoom out a bit, move up. And right now we are over here, this portion. Portion, this horizontal portion over here is two millimeter. Okay. So meaning you will create a horizontal line over here with dimension of 2 millimeters angle of zero degrees. Okay. So now we have all our lines. Next, we need to create this curved portion and we will do it by using spline tool. Okay? So let's click on that. So we will start or spline over here at the top. Okay. So then we have a little bit outward, then I will create another curve handle here as well. Then one over here, and then I will go down a bit, create one over here, one over somewhere over here. Here and finally connected to this point. Okay. So that is our entire spline, press scape, and the curve has been created. Press scape again to exit out of the spline tool. And now, we need to set the distance to this wides point somewhere over here to this central z axis. Basically, the radius of this handle. And that radius is going to be the diameter is 35 millimeter radius would be half of that, meaning 17.5 millimeters. So what I'm going to do this point over here, this point, this is the curve handle of that point and this is the actual point on that curve. So this point over here is going to be the furthest from the central axis. So I will click select the smart dimension tool. I will select this point, and I will select the central vertical Z axis. Okay. And let's put that dimension somewhere over here, and this is going to be 17.5 millimeters. Okay, so somewhere over there. That kind of seems a bit too much. So let's try to decrease it. Let's type something like 10 millimeters. That seems to be way more appropriate. So this point needs to be the furthest from the central axis. So I will just simply push this point a bit inward and a little bit upward as well. Similarly, this one should go in as well and something like this. So I like this profile. So once the profile is completed, we simply need to press close and there we have our sketch. Now, as you know, just simply click over here on this Revolution tool. Next to feature. Let's click on that. The angle is going to be 360 because we want complete revolution and around vertical sketch axis, everything is perfectly fine. Simply press. Okay. And there we have our handle. Now, let's start creating the screwdriver. Okay. So now to this point, what we've been doing. After that, for example, over here under task, as you can see, we have create body over here. Okay? However, if I click on any surface or any one of these any surface of this model like select, the options change. Now it is create sketch, fill it, Jam fer, all of the different things I can do on this surface. Okay. So basically, if I click Create sketch now, that new sketch is going to be part of this same old body. Okay. So in order to create a new body, you first need to deselect everything. So I will deselect everything, and then over here, I can access the option of create a new bod. But before that, whenever there are more than one parts or when you are creating model of a multibody part, it is always a better practice or a very good recommendation to name all of your parties. Okay, so just a moment ago, I selected or I clicked on this new body button over here. That is why we have body one, which is the screw driver, and this body 001. So what I'm going to do. Sorry, this body 001 is actually the screw driver and this body is actually another body which doesn't really exist. So it may be that I accidentally created a body and then I went back to create another body. What I'm going to do, since this body over here, it represents nothing, so I'm just going to select it, press the delete key. Now it is deleted. Now this body 001, as you can see, under it, we have this sketch and we have the Revolution tool, meaning this is actually the handle. For this one, what I'm going to do, I'm going to right click and go down a bit and over here, we have rename, or you can simply press the hot key F two. I'm just going to rename it as handle. So it is always a good practice to rename or create write contextual names for your multibody parts. Okay. Now let's zoom out. Now, let's deselect everything, click on this task button, click on Create body. Then for that new body, once again, we will have to create a sketch. Okay, here. So once again, we will have to select any one of these plans, and since we are going to be creating this screwdriver, so once again what we will use, we will use the Revolution tool. Okay? Basically, once again, I will create it by using X via plan. Or another approach can be creating a plan somewhere over here. Okay and then creating a circle and then using the pad tool. You can do that as well. However, I find the revolution tool to be a bit more easy. So first of all, we need to create our line. Okay? So there is going to be vertical line from this point to this point. Okay, so we will be creating this screw driver, but once again, we will only create half sketch. Okay. So first, let's just create a cylinder. And then we will create this top portion as well. So it is 5 millimeters, so obviously we will have to create a rectangle kind of rectangle which is the height of 140 millimeter and the length or width of the half of five, which is going to be 2.5 millimeters. Okay. So let's do that and one more thing is that rectangle should be 20 millimeter above this origin point. Okay. Meaning that rectangle should not start over here, it should start somewhere over here. So first of all, let's change the view to wire frame so that we can see inside. A rectangle should start over here. Let's click on rectangle. We will create it this corner to corner and click somewhere arbitrarily arbitrarily, somewhere over here. This is the length. This is going to be half a five, meaning 2.5. Sorry, 2.5 press Enter and its height is going to be 140. Let's press Enter and there we have our rectangle. Okay, press the scap to exit out of the rectangle tool. Now, what we're going to do, I will select the dimension tool once again, click this horizontal line of this rectangle and this origin. So this distance, as you know, from where did it go? Oops. Okay. This distance from this point to this point is 20 millimeter. Okay? So I will write for this dimension from this point to this point is going to be 20 millimeters. Press Okay. Press close. There we have our sketch. Let's change the view back to Wireframe from wireframe to flat lines and click on Revolution. Complete 360 degrees, press. Okay. Now, let's go back to model. Now we have another body apart from handle, which is the screw driver. Right click on it or simply press F two. It is selected. Left click to select it, press F two. Now we can rename it, F two is the hotkey for renaming and it is going to be screw driver. Click and now we have contextual names for parts inside this model. Now we need to create this top portion over here. So what I'm just going to do, I will click on this surface and go to tasks, create a sketch. Okay. Next, I'll create external geometry and we will extract this circle. Okay. So then I will select the circle tool. And we'll simply create a circle just equal to this previously created circle, meaning 5 millimeters, press close. Okay. And we'll be creating this top portion by using ag tool, basically. Okay. Next, what I'm going to do, I will click on this and basically this circle is going to be the first sketch, and somewhere over here, we'll create the second sketch. Okay. So let's click on this circle, this top surface, create a Tatum plan. Go to front view. Okay. And we will then move this plan upward, meaning in Z axis by two or 3 millimeters. Let's say four millimeter, five millimeter. Okay. So 5 millimeters, press. Okay. Then click on this. I will click on this plan and create a new sketch. Okay. So once again, what I'm going to do, I will create reference geometry, and I cannot create a reference geometry because that is way below. Because we are not creating any sketch on this plan basically. Okay. But we know that the diameter of this circle is 5 millimeters. So I'll just create a circle. It is only going to be temporary for its diameter would be five millimeter. Next, I will create a rectangle. But a centered rectangle. You will momentarily understand what I'm trying to create. Okay? So the top width of the screwdriver is going to be 1.5 millimeters. I will type 1.5. Okay. And then just for this length, just move it up outward up to that circle. Okay, like this. So this is going to be an inscribed rectangle, but with the width of two point sorry, 1.5 millimeters. Now what I'm going to do, I'm going to press scap to exit out of a rectangle tool, select this circle, press delete. So we only needed this rectangle, and I created that circle basically to align this rectangle inside that circle which we created on the surface of that on that circular surface of the screw driver. Whereas this rectangle is going to be on this plan. So this is another thing that you need to keep in mind while creating CAD models that you will create circles, squares, sorry not spares, circles, squares, and a lot more different kind of sketch elements only as references. And then you just have to delete them. Okay? So let's press close. Okay. Then press click on this plan and space bar to turn off its visibility. So now, if you go to model, we have this sketch 002, which is the circle over here and this e003, which is this rectangle over here. And on these two different sketches, we are going to be using the tool, additive lag tool. And we know what the tool is going to do. It is going to combine those two sketches to basically create a three dimensional geometry. And basically, the purpose, the goal over here of creating this kind of shape is to to inform you or teach you that for the lag tool, the two different sketches that do not have to be necessarily sand. So we have been using the lag tool we use the additive loft while creating the glass. But in that time, both of the sketches or there were three sketches, and all three of those sketches were circles. In this case, one is a circle and one is a rectangle, but the lafTol will work just the same. So I will select this sketch and this sketch. Okay? Both of those sketches are selected. Let's click on this additive loft. Okay. And as you can see, it is creating the desired share. Okay? So simply press close. And now, if you want to, you can add some Jam fA over here as well. Okay? So for example, if I click on this TEMF tool, you can just leave it like this if you want to. But let's just add a little bit of jumper. I will select two edges over here and one edge over here. Let's click on the preview. So it is this kind of share. Let's change the view. Okay. So that is not correct. So what I will do, I will change the type of this jumper from equal distance to two distances. Okay. The first distance, let's see which one it actually is. Let's say I type 0.5, click over here to update. Okay. Nothing really happens. Let's increase this one. Nothing really happens as well. Let's increase this one. Okay. So let's select the size two to be 0.5. Okay. Okay. So basically the 0.5, size two is the length over here, the horizontal distance and size this one, 4.50 is the vertical one. Okay? So let's just keep it at zero point Let's make it a very small number, 0.25 Okay. And let's see if I type two over here. Okay, let's keep increasing that three, four. So five is a bit too much. 4.5. Okay, so this is the shape we can get. So if you don't want to create a chamfer over here, you can just leave it at this point. But let's just create a jumper and press Okay. And there you have your. We have our screwdriver, and we basically created it by using two different bodies. So now if I save this model of screw driver by simply pressing the Control S and then saving it over here, let's save it as screwdriver. Okay. Then basically what it is going to do, that freak document is going to be containing both of these two parts, this handle part and this screw driver part. Okay. So this is how you create two different This is how you create parts or CAD models which have more than one parts. But the condition is that those different or more than one parts, those multibodies inside a singular part do not have a certain motion or mechanism. Basically when they are fixed. If there is a locomotion and certain motion or there is some kind of a motion, then you would ooe the assemblies. Okay. And we will learn that in a future lecture as well. So this is all for this lecture. Thank you. 19. Day 14: Part Modelling - Ventilation Grill: So this is going to be the day 14 or the 14th project of this course. And in this lecture, we are going to be learning how to create this ventilation grill. Okay, so it is going to be a rather quick lecture, and we will basically learn different types of sketch features or sketch options, which we have not learned in the previous lectures. Okay. So I will just close it and create a new parametric part five. So if I go over to the dimensions, so this is how that ventilation grill is basically going to look like. It is going to be rectangular. Is length would be 1,000 millimeter and 100 millimeter. It is going to be this long plt, thousand millimeter long, 100 millimeter tall. And in it, there are going to be openings for ventilation in the form of a slot. Okay. And the length of that slot would be 40 millimeters width would be 30 millimeter, and there are going to be 12 multiply by three, meaning 36 different slots. 12 columns like one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, like that, and then three rows, one, two, three. Okay. And horizontally center to center distance between two consecutive lots or openings is going to be 75 millimeter and vertically from the one over here over here to over here, vertically, there is going to be the distance is going to be 30 millimeter. And the thickness of this plat would be 2 millimeters. Okay. So basically, we are going to be learning two new things in this lecture. One, we are going to be learning how to create slots, and secondly, we will use rectangular array, which is a kind of rectangular pattern which we or linear pattern basically, which we have used in a previous lecture for features, in this case, we will use it for sketch elements, and it will not be only limited to one direction going in this horizontal direction or in vertical direction. We will do both of these things go in this direction and in this direction, basically creating a table in directly in sketch elements, in sketcher Wpens basically. So let's go to free cat. The merrimds are in millimeter, so let's keep it at that and simply click on Create a sketch. So we can basically create it on top view or this XY plane or this front plan X plan. It doesn't really matter. Let's just select the front plan. Okay. So first of all, as you can see that it is going to be a rectangle. Okay, this rectangle. Length 100 length thousand height, 100. Let's create that simply click on this classic rectangle, start it over here, move around a bit, and let's just leave the mouse and start typing dimensions. So its length is 1,000 millimeter, so type 1,000 press Enter. Height is 100 millimeter, type 100, press Enter. And there we have our rectangle. Now we need to create these kind of slots. So you can basically create slots a longer way and a shorter way. The longer methodology would be creating a rectangle like this and then creating an arc. Okay, over here, then starting it over here and like this, and then creating another arc over here and then deleting these lines, like this. So there you have a slot. However, this is very tedious and I'll just delete that and it quite so happens that we have a slot tool directly in sketcher workbench for creating sketches, and it is over here. So I will simply select the slot tool, and what I'm going to do, I'm going to create a slot somewhere over here. We will only create one slot. Okay. So let's create a slot somewhere over here. Okay. And its length is going to be, how much is it? 40 and width is ten. So this first number, it is asking you, it is going to be its length. So it would be 40 millimeter type 40, press Enter. Then you have the angle, meaning basically the orientation of this arc. We want it to be perfectly horizontal, meaning angle would be zero degrees. Type zero, press enter. Then it is going to ask for its height. So if you increase a bit too much, it is basically going to turn into a circle, okay? So let's decrease that, and this is going to be how much it it is width this ten millimeter. So just type ten. And there you have a slot. Okay. So let's close. And now I think it is a good time to learn or explore some of the different options over here, from this point to this point. Okay. So for that demonstration purpose, I will just create a new rectangle over here. Okay. Let's just focus your attention to this rectangle. Now if I select this rectangle, o, right now, as you can see, I have not selected anything, these options are blurred out from this point to this point. Okay. But if I select these, these different options become available. So starting at this point, here we have remove axis alignment. So this is basically going to remove the constraints which are to its axis, basically. Okay. And it is basically going, for example, this line is perfectly horizontal. These two lines are equal. It is going to remove those different kind of alignments and constraints. Next to that, here we have symmetry, and it works just like it worked for features which we used in, I think, third or fourth lecture. Okay. So for example, if I use it, click on this symmetry. Okay? Now, everything is selected, I simply need to select a vertical or horizontal or basically any flat line. Okay? For example, if I hover over this line, it is going to create a symmetric part or symmetric profile of this sketch, which is a rectangle across that selected line. If I hover on this line, it is going to create a reflection or mirror image over to the other side, Sam over here, Sam over here. And you can simply select these axes as well. For example, if I hover over this, it is creating a new duplicate mirror image of that rectangular sketch over here. Okay? Like over here. Let's say if I click, now we have two similar sketches. So this was the original sketch. This sketch over here is its symmetric or mirror image. Okay. So you can also create symmetric images or symmetry or mirror images of sketch elements in sketcher as well. So let's select everything, press close. Okay. Sorry, press Delete to delete everything. Once again, I will select this rectangle, and after that, you have this option, which is offset. This is basically used to create a concentric element or concentric basically concentric closed shape sketch element around or out of or inside that selected sketch element. So for example, if I delete it and if I click on this line tool, I will create this arbitrarily random shape, something like this. Okay, let's move it like this. Okay. Now if I select everything, click on this offset, and as you can see, if you go inside, we can create a duplicate image or the duplicate of that sketch element inside that originally created shape. And if we go out, we can create an offsetted duplicate on the outside surface. Okay. So you can also select, you can go over here, enter the dimension, which is going to be the distance between the original shape and the newly created shap duplicate. It can be in this direction or in this direction. For example, if I go in downward direction type, let's say, -20. If you're creating inside, then you will have to create write the dimensions in minus with minus symbol. So if I press Enter, now, the distance between this line and this line is going to be 20 millimeter. This line is this line is going to be 20 millimeters. You can simply directly create duplicates inside or outside provided that they have the same center by using this offset tool. So this chap, which was the original chap and this chap, they both basically have their same center. Okay? So this is how offset tool works. Then you have this option. This is basically very simple. It is scale. You can basically enlarge or decrease the size of selected sketch elements. So for example, if I select everything, click on this scale transform, and then you simply have to select a point around which you want to enlarge or make the sketch element smaller. So for example, if I select this point, left click to select. Now if I move around, I can enlarge it and or make it small. And then you have to basically select direction. So right now it is asking me for direction. So let's say along this direction. Okay. Then if you move away, it is basically making that sketch shape larger. Okay? And if you go in this direction, it is making it smaller around that selected point and selected line. Okay? As you can also enter in millimeters, the factor by which you want to scale. For example, if I write two over here, it is going to create it is going to enlarge that originally created shape by two times, basically making it double of what it was originally. Okay? Simply press control Z to move back to its original shape. Okay. So this is transform. Next, you have two different patterns or arrays. Okay. So these basically work like polar pattern and linear pattern, which we have used for creating features, meaning creating duplicates of a feature in a linear order or in a linear manner across a line or a circle. So first of all, over here, so I will select everything. Okay. Firstly, over here, we have this polar or rotate transform or polar pattern. To use this, you simply need to select it, then go over here. Here you would need to enter the number of copies you basically want, one, two, three, four, whatever. Let's say I type three. Three. Then go over here. Next, you will need to select a point around which you want to rotate. Let's say if I select this point and it can be any other point as well, let's say I select origin. You can select any point in your sketch. I can even select this point. That point does not have to be attached to that shape you are basically trying to create a polar transform or polar array of. So if I select this origin, Okay. Then it is going to ask you for the angle. This angle is basically going to be the starting point of that array. So let's say if I go over here and now if I move around, Okay. As you can see, it is creating three copies of that part. So one is the original part, then we have three copies. So basically, it is creating four parts, four occurrences. And you can adjust them starting at over here at whatever angle you want. If you basically return it to this point, it is going to put everything over there, and you can go in this direction or in this direction. And let's say if I stop over here, now it has created four copies in rotatory manner of this original share. So this is basically how polar array or Pal polar transform basically works. Okay. Let's press Control Z, and I will simply just delete it because we no longer need it. Next to that, we have this option, move or array transform. And this is basically going to be the option or tool we will use to create duplicate copies of this slot that we created over here or this opening for ventilation on this plate. Okay? So for this, you first of all, have to select everything you want to create array of. I will drag a box like this. So this array this slot is selected. And you can see over here that this lot which we created using this slot tool is basically the combination of two lines, one line over here, one line over here. So this is this line and this line, and two arcs. So this arc and this arc. So basically creating it is doing the same thing as which was while creating a rectangle and then creating an arc, but just direct, it is creating it a direct tool. So let's zoom out a bit so that we can see everything like this. Now, let's simply click on this move or array transform tool. So let's left click on there. Okay. So now before doing everything, we need to focus over here. So turn our attention over here. So here it is asking me for number of copies. This is basically the number of rows. So how much do I want? How many rows do I want? Sorry, not rows. It is basically the number of columns. So how many columns, 12 columns and three rows. Okay. So in horizontal direction, we want total of 12 open shafts. Okay. So over here, I will type this number to be 11, not 12, because if I type 12, it is going to create 13 occurrences. 12 copies plus one the original slot over here. Okay. So whatever the number of columns you have, you will have to minus, you have to decrease that number by one. Okay. And rows are going to be three. Okay. So we have set up the copies in rows. Now we can basically select a point on this slot. We can select that point over here, this arc or this arc. If it's like this arc, it is going to be this center point of R. If it's like this point, it is going to be directly this point. Or if it select this line, it is going to be the center point of this line. And whatever point you select right now is going to be the reference from which the center to center distances between different copies vertically and horizontally, are going to be evaluated. Okay. So what I'm going to do, I'm going to select this line. Okay? And now, if I move away, as you can see, it is creating different copies. Let's zoom out a bit different copies. And it is from this point over here, this center to that similar point on the next consecutive slot or next consecutive copy. And we know from our dimensions, horizontal distance is 75 vertical distance is 30. Okay? So let's go over here. Let's type 75. So the first distance it is asking you is horizontal distance. So type 75, press Enter. Okay. Now that centry to center distance is fixed. Now we can change the angle. We can make it like this, like this over here, wherever you want. But we want them in perfectly horizontal manner. Okay? So angle would be zero degrees. So type zero. So now it has created the first row for us. Now it'll shift its focus toward the second direction. And now if I move around, as you can see, it is creating three rows. So the first two variables which were the center to center distance and angle, it was asking those in one direction, first direction, which was the horizontal direction. Okay? Once that was set, it will change its focus to vertical or second direction. Okay. So now, once again, it is asking us for a distance, and this is going to be the center to center distance but in vertical direction. And that is 30 millimeter. Okay? So we will type 30 press enter. And once again, the angle. Okay? And as you know, it is going to be like this. There is going to be perpendicular or 90 degree angle between the rows and columns. So the angle would be 90. Now if you were to make it downward over here, you will have to enter -90. But we are grating it over here in the upward direction, so 90 degrees. Type 90, press Enter. Now you have basically total of 12 columns and three rows, meaning 12 multiplier by 36 different slots created on this plate. You can basically put one more slot over here as well. Okay? So I originally said that you have to create 12 columns. You can create 13 columns as well. Okay. So if you want to, you can just simply press Control Z, and let's just do it Control Z, select everything again for the practice. Okay. So select everything again. Select the rectangular or transform tool, or it is also called a rectangular pattern. This time for copies, I would say 12 Rows three once again. Now select this line. Horizontal distance, 75 angle would be zero. Then go upward. Distance would be 30 in vertical direction angle would be 90. Now this seems more appropriate. So change it to 13 columns over here. Okay, so I will change it. So now our sketch is basically ready. We can simply press gloss and just click on this pad tool, and what is the thickness is 2 millimeters. It is a very thin plat. So type two, click over here to update the view and press. Okay. And there you have your ventilation grill ready. So that was all for this lecture, and in this lecture, we basically explore different type of sketch elements like symmetry and different kind of sketch elements which we have basically used in features but not in sketch. In features, they are available over here. Okay? Linear pattern, polar pattern, and mirrored. The opposite of those sketcher workbench while creating sketches are symmetry offset, polar array and rectangular or simple array transform. Okay. And the difference between using it over here, for example, if we had created just one slot and then had used the pad feature, or the other way would be creating this plat, then creating this slot over here on this surface, then using the pocket tool to create this opening over here. Okay? Then if you tried to use this with this one, linear pattern, you would only be able to move it in one direction. So you would be able to create this one row, but the other two rows creating those would be impossible. Okay? So the upside of using polar, the rectangular array or array transform in sketcher is that you can create similar features in similar shapes basically in both X and Y axis or in both vertical and horizontal axis. Okay. So that was all for this lecture. Thank you. 20. Day 15: Part Modelling - Vented Rotor Disc: So this is going to be the 15th lecture of CAD part modeling. And it is going to be a final project for this section. After that, we will start creating assemblies. And in this last lecture or project, we are going to be creating this rotor disc. So the nut rotate disk vented rotor. Okay? It is used for disc brakes in vehicles. It is also called a vented rotor or vented disc. Okay. And the goal of this project is going to be learning how to carry out the boolean operations, as well as a little part modeling exercise as well. Okay. So it is going to have this surface there are going to be vents inside it from this point to opening on the inside over here as well, and there is going to be a lot of other stuff. Okay? So holes over here, some grooves over here as well. Okay, so let's start creating it. So I will click on this start, or I will just close this model and create a new parametric part file. So over here, I have the dimensions in millimeters. So we are going to select the dimensions units in the system of units to be standard, meaning length in millimeters. And we're just going to start creating. So I will click on Create sketch. So before I click Create Sketch, there is something that I want to talk about in free. So right now, when, for example, if I close it, okay, this card, create a new parametric part file. Now I created that file, and over here, as you can see, the helper task or helper tool is assigning me the task to create a sketch. This means that it has already created a body for us, okay? And for that body, the software free cad is asking us to create a sketch. If I go over to model, here we have that body. However, if by some accident, instead of clicking anywhere over here or somewhere over here, if you click by accident inside this view port, let's say I click somewhere over here. Left click. Okay, I left click somewhere over here. Now, the task has changed from create sketch to create Body. So that basically means now if I go to model and over here, once again, I have that body. So now to create the sketch for inside this body, I will have to click on this Select This body, left click to select, now go to sketch and click over here on Create Task. Create sketch story. And that sketch will once again be created inside this body. However, if you left click somewhere over here, then look around over here, and the task is saying create body. So you might think that the software is asking me to create a body, and since obviously you will be creating a body, so if you somehow create click on this create body over here instead of going over here and selecting this body, if you click on this create body, Okay, then it says Create sketch. Okay. However, if you go to model, now this time it has created another body, body 001. And there is this default body over there as well. So now if you create a sketch, it will be created inside this body 001. Okay. So this basically means that you basically have created a shadow body, this body over here, which has no sketch attached to it. So be careful while working in free cat and avoid shadow bodies which have no sketches, et cetera attached to it. Okay. So I will just close it. So this is limitation or defect, I can say in freekt which you need to be avaable. Okay. So I will create a parametric part file once again. My limits millimeter. So we are in body, so I will go to Task and click on Create sketch. Okay. And I'm going to be creating this from the bottom up. Okay? So I will select the X Y plan or the top plane, and we can start creating our sketches. So first of all, we will create this larger outer plt. Okay? And it has a diameter of 330 millimeters. So it would be 330 millimeters. I will create a circle with its center at the origin and diameter equal to 330 millimeters. Okay. Let's zoom out a bit and here we are. Then we have this portion over here, another circle, which is 150 millimeter in diameter, and that is basically going upward over here. So it is going to be coming up to this point, then will go upward, then horizontal, then downward, and then horizontal once again. Okay. So I'll create the second circle now. Once again, its center would be origin and diameter would be 150 millimeters because over here we have 150. So let's create another circle from starting its center at origin, 150. Okay. Now we can click on close, and here we have two circles. Now we can click on PD and basically start creating a plat. So if you look over here, we have one, two plates, each with a thickness of 10 millimeters. And inside, you have this gap where the ventilation ducts are going to be placed or vents are going to be placed. And the height of those vents is 15 millimeters. Okay. So we will create this entire region from this point to this point right now by this pad feature over here. And then later we will create these vented ducts in between them. By using the Boolean feature. So currently, we will have to pad it from this point to this point. That is 10 millimeters for this plate, then 15 millimeters for the ventilation gaps or the vent or the gap for the vents. So that becomes ten plus 15, 25, and then the second plat ten millimeter once again. So that is 35 millimeters. Meaning over here, the length of this pad is going to be 35 millimeters. So I will type 35, click over here to update the view. Click Okay. Okay. Those vents we will create at the end by using Booleans. Okay. Now let's start creating this portion, or this portion. So once again, I will click on this surface, create sketch. Okay. So our first sketch is going to be equal to this internal circle, which is the diameter of 150 millimeters. I will create a circle starting at the origin 150. Okay. We can also create the reference geometry and then tie this sketch to that reference geometry extracted from the previous sketch. But we know that the dimension is a 150, so we can just enter there. Now we need to create a portion expanding upward from this surface. We know the thickness all over this entire disc is 10 millimeters. Meaning this portion over here, so it is going to be something like this. Let me try this real quick. Okay. So it is going to be like this going upward, then in this direction, and then in this direction, there is going to be holes over here as well, these holes, one, two, three, four, five, and thickness over here is also 10 millimeters. Okay. So since thickness is going to be 10 millimeters, this means that I will have to create another circle and diameter for that circle should be 150 millimeter plus the thickness of ten millimeter, and that comes out to be 160 millimeters. 150 plus ten equals 160. So let's create that 160 has it created, why can I not see it? So let's delete it, and let's create it once again. So this is first circle, this circle that we created, and then we will create the second circle. 160. Press Enter and right now it is over here. Press close. We have this sketch over here, click on pad and how much padding we need to create. It is 40 millimeter over here from this point to this point. 40 press and press close. Okay. Then what we're going to do, we're going to create this portion. Okay. So what I will do, I will click on the surface, this surface, create sketch. So first of all, we will have to close it basically, and then after closing it, we will start creating this holes and these other four smaller holes for bolts as well. Okay. So first, simply create a circle up to this point, or up to this point, whatever, let's create it up to this point. So we know this outer circle has the diameter one 60 millimeters, so create it one 60 millimeters, press Okay, press close, and once again, we're going to use the pad feature and it is padding it in the upward direction. We don't want that. We want to pad this in the downward direction. Okay? And the thickness is 10 millimeters, so I will keep this length as ten. The only thing I will change is I will check this reversed box, so the direction is downward in the downward direction because if I don't do that, it will create 40 millimeter up to this point and then ten millimeter on top of that as well. And we don't want that. The distance from this point to the top of this portion is 40, not 50. Okay. So for that, I will have to check this reversed option over here to make sure that this padding is in the downward direction. Peso. Okay. Now we can create these holes over here. Okay? So let's start creating. Let's start creating those. And these holes are on this surface. So I will select this surface, left click to select, then click Create sketch. Okay. Firstly, let's create the central hole. So it is going to be a circle and its diameter is 70 millimeters. Let's create it circle Center at the origin 770, 70, Enter. Here it is. Next, we have one, two, three, four circles over here, and these do not have direct diameter, so we will just have to enter the diameters for those arbitrarily. Arbitraly. I will create one circle over here somewhere in the middle and let's make it. Let's increase its size. That is a bit too big. 525 seems to be reasonable amount, 25 millimeters. Okay. So we have this circle over here, but we need to position it in its correct position, and that is the distance between the center of this smaller circle to this outer larger circle and this internal smaller circle should be equal. Okay? It will basically ensure that this circle is right in between this circle and this circle. Okay. And we can evaluate that distance. This larger circle, as we know, it has the diameter of how much 150 millimeter diameter. That means it will have the radius of 150/2, and that is 75 millimeters. I don't think I need to pull up the calculator. It is 75 millimeters, meaning the distance from the center to this point, where the cursor is right now is 75 millimeter. Similarly, the diameter of this circle is 70 millimeters. So its radius would be 70/30 5 millimeters, meaning the distance from this point to this point. Okay? This point is 35 millimeter and the distance from this point to this point is 75 millimeters. We simply need to evaluate the distance between this point and this point. Okay? This distance, basically. Okay. So now from here to here, 75 millimeter here to here, 35 millimeter. And the difference of that would be distance from here to here. So 75 -35, 75 -35 40. Meaning the distance from this point, the circumference of this circle to circumference of this circle is 40 millimeter, and half of that would be 20 millimeter, 40/20. Meaning now I can just select a dimension tool, select this circle and select this point, and I can assign this distance to be 20 millimeters. Simple as that. Okay. So now that circle is in its correct position, so you will have to do these kind of calculations while creating card models. You can either do them in your head or you can just pull up a piece of paper and do these calculations there. So right now, we need similar circle over here, over here and over here. So for that we know that we know that we have a tool, and that tool is over here. It is called rotate, transform or polar array. So I will click on that. How many copies we want? We want three because in total, we want four circles, so three copies plus the original means four. And we will start it over here from this axis, this red line, so left click on that. Okay, so that would be the starting position and move around. Sorry, I messed up. So once again, select this circle, click on polar transform three. So the first selection is the center around which those polar arrays or the copies are going to be generated, and that center is going to be the center origin. So I will click that the starting point. Then the next selection point would be the starting point and it would be this line then we will just go completely around up to this point. Okay. So that is perfect, left click and we have our sketch. Okay, so one, two, three, four, five, all of these circles are created. We can simply close out of this sketch, and since we want to use these circles to create holes, so the feature we will be using for this sketch is going to be packet. So I will click on that. Now, obviously, we want through all holes, so we don't need to put any dimension over here, any length, we can simply change the type from dimension to through all. Okay. And as you can see it creates through all folds. Let's press Okay, and here we are. Now let's turn our attention to this surface and creating these holes, as well as these grooves. Okay. So let's start creating those. I will click on this surface. Obviously, this is going to be the surface on which we are going to be creating the sketch. Okay. So first, we will create these grooves. And as you can see, these grooves are in a curved shape, something like this. Okay. So what we will do, we will create them by using the subtractive Laugh tool. Subtractive laugh or subtractive pipe, sorry. Subtractive pipe tool. Okay? Not log, subtractive pipe. Meaning, first we will create a path, and then we will create the profile. Okay, so let's first create a path. Since the path is, as you can see in a curved manner, so we will select this curve tool or the Bs plant tool, and we will start it somewhere over here. Okay? And I will insert the next curve handle somewhere over here, somewhere in the middle of the surface here in the final over here. Press Scape to exit to complete that curve and then scap again to exit out of the curve tool. Now, let's drag this middle curve to this point and this one to this point, something like this. Okay? That is perfect. Let's close. So this sketch is going to be the path for our subtractive pipe. Now we simply need to create the profile because subtractive pipe, just like the additive pipe needs two sketches, one path and one profile. And as you know, I said that the profile sketch needs to be connected to this path sketch. Meaning we will have to create sketch on a plan which is passing through this point, or this point. It can be this point or this point. Okay. So what I will do, I will simply select this point, go to tasks and click on Create at Atom plan. We will simply create that plan. Okay. So right now, as you can see, it is just creating a plan like this and we don't like that it we want it in the opposite direction. So what I will do under references, if you look over here, the first reference is this vertex that we select. Vertex are basically points. Okay? So these are the terminologies of CAD modeling. Okay? It is the same in computer edit design as well as in polygonal modling softwares like blender, et cetera. Okay. So for example, if you have a triangle, Okay, like this. This triangle is not going to be spawned out of nothing. Okay? First of all, you will have points. You will have points, one point over here, one point over here, and let's say another point is over here. So these are the three points. These points are called vertics and the plural is going to be vertices. If we join this point to this point, and this to this point, then these lines, basically, which are from one point to another point, these are termed as edges. This is an edge, this is an edge. Now if I create this third edge like this, so we have three edges, but this region inside it is enclosed from all sides. When it is enclosed from all sides, this region is termed as Paz. Okay. So this is computer edit design as well as CGI modeling terminology, Vitis edges, and phases. Okay. Now let's go back to modeling. Okay. So as you can see, the first reference over here is reference one. Instead of reference one, over here, we have Vitis. So we will select the second reference. I will click on the second reference button, reference two over here. Left click on there. Now, whatever we select is going to be that second reference. Okay. And second reference, we can either select this surface or it would be better if you selected this surface. This will basically align that plan according to this surface as well as it will make sure that it is passing through this vertex that we selected initially. So I will left click on that surface, this surface. And right now, as you can see, it is creating a plan which is aligned with this surface as well as it is keeping that vertex inside that plan. That vertex is on top of that plan. So now we have a plan let's press Okay, and we will select this plan and we will create a sketch. Okay. And it would be somewhere over here. So click on circle tool and hover over to select that point. So just we can rotate to make sure that we're selecting that point. Let's select this point, and as you can see, we can create a circle. Right now, if you look over here, the dimensions or the width of this groove is 10 millimeters over here and over here as well, meaning the diameter of the circle should be 10 millimeters. So 10 millimeters press enter and close. Okay. So right now, we have our profile sketch and our pase sketch. Now we no longer need this plan, so we cannot delete it because if you delete it, this sketch is going to disappear as well. So I will simply select it as scap to turn off its visibility to simply hide it. It still exists, but we cannot see. Okay. Now, Let's select this circle because this is going to be the profile sketch and click on this subtractive pipe. Left click to select. Profile sketch is selected. It is sketch 005, which is the circle. Now, some over here, click on object which is going to be the path sketch. The second sketch we are going to be selecting is going to be the path sketch and I will select this line. As you can see, it is showing me this red color, meaning material is going to be removed. Simply press Okay, and here we have our groove. Okay. Now if you want to create a little bit of fill it, we can do it as well. So I'm just going to keep it as it is. If you want to create it, you can simply fill it these edges as well as these edges over here. This edge internal edge and over here as well. Now let's go to top view and we have this groove over here. Now, we want this same groove over here, over here, and over here as well. And we know to create patterns of features we have polar pattern over here. So I will simply select this subtractive pipe, which is this feature and click on this polar pattern. Okay. So first of all, we will have to select the axis around which we are going to be creating this polar sketch. So currently it is normal sketch axis, meaning it is creating copies around this sketch. So for example, if I increase to three, it is creating somewhere over here, and that is not correct position. We want to want the copies to be created around the central axis. Okay? So for this axis, I will change it from normal sketch axis to bass vertical upward axis that is Zi bass Z axis. Okay. Now the second copy is placed over here. Angle is going to be 360 because we want it all around, and there are going to be four occurrences like this. Okay. And that is perfectly fine. Press Okay. And here we have four groups. Now we can create these holes. Okay. And as you can see, there are three holes to the right side of this curve and four to the left side, this other side of the curve. Okay. So you create that. So once again, click on this surface, go to task and create sketch. Let's create or circles. So the circle tool, create one circle somewhere over here. What should it be time? Let's make them 20. Okay, create another over here and another over here. Okay. Let's position them correctly, and this one is now accidentally tied to this vertical Y axis. I will select this circle and delete it and create a circle over here. If it is tied to the vertical axis, we can only move it along that axis. I could not have moved that circle left or right. I'll create another circle over here. These are the three circles to the right. Okay. These three circles. Now let's create these. Okay. So once again, the circle tool, let's create one over here, one over here, one over here. No need to insert the dimensions. Okay, we will do it after creating. Okay. Now let's put them at their respective positions. If you want to really careful about it, you can create a curve and then align these circles on that curve. Okay. So here we have three on this side, four on this side, circles, and I think the positions are about right. Now there is only one circle we have assigned dimensions to, that is perfectly fine. We can simply select all of these circles by creating a box and simply click on this equal constraint. Click on that. It is not working. So let's select all of these circles individually, one, two, three, four, five, six, and at last, select the circle which has dimensions provided to it. Now if I click on equal, now it works. The dimensions for that circle to which we have provided the dimensions 20 millimeter, those dimensions are applied all over the sketch to all of the circles that we selected. Now, simply select all of them, click on polar pattern or polar transform. It is going to be once again, three copies, three plus one this original copy. It is going to be around this center, so it's left click to select this center, starting at this angle and then going around up to ending over here. Okay. So we did not have to create the circles over here, here, here, here, here and here. Okay? Or if we had created the holes using only these circles and then use the polar pattern for the feature, the results would have been SAM as well. Okay. So let's close here we have our sketch, click on pocket, and once again, these are going to be holes. So just change the type two through all instead of inserting dimensions and click Okay. Okay. So here we have holes. Now let's start creating those vents. And for those vents, we are going to be creating another geometry. Okay. What we are going to do, we are going to unselect this body, let's rename this body to left click, click on rename, and let's type, let's call it disk. Okay, so this is the disk. Click on task. And start creating this body. But before doing that, let's change the appearance of this body to basically differentiate between the two bodies when we have more than one body. To change the appearance, we have two options. We can simply right click and click on this appearance button. Its hot key is Control D. Left click on that, and here you can either select a certain material and apply it to this geometry, which is going to be required in the later sections of this course when we will be conducting finite element analysis or you can simply click on this customer appearance over here and change this different colors. We have ambient diffuse MSF. V basically, most of the time you'll be working in diffuse colors, double click on this diffuse color and select whatever color you want. For example, if I select something like green, press, close and right now, as you can see, our body has the green color. Okay, or if you don't want a certain specific color, you can simply right click and click on this random color. It will basically assign a random color to your geometry. Let's click on it again. It will assign a different random color, once again, a different. That is how you can change the appearance of your geometries. Now let's start creating that second body. So go to task, deselect everything, click on Create body. For that, we will have to create a sketch, and for this sketch, we will select once again the top. Or XY plane. Here it is. So select X yplane I'm not going to hide this body because we are going to be requiring this far as a reference, basically. Okay? So instead of hiding this, I will go over here and change the view from flat lines to frame. Okay. The sketch of that body is first of all, going to be a circle, with its center at the origin. And somewhere over here. It should be smaller than this circle, this internal circle of this disc, but not way behind that. So somewhere over here is perfect. Now, press close, and now what we're going to do, we're going to use the pad feature, and the pad feature is the length of this pad is going to be the height of those vents, and that is over here, 15 millimeter, okay? From this point to this point, it is 50. So type 15 for the length, press over here to update the view, press. Okay. Okay. Now what we're going to do, let's keep this body over here as well. Okay. So now let's clear something else as well. We will do it at the end. It is not needed right now. So once again, we will select this surface, click on Create sketch, and now we will create the sketch for those vents, basically. Okay. And as you can see, those vents are going to be in a curved manner, like a spiral, basically. Okay. And the opening, the gap from this point to this point, the width of those openings at the outer side, it is going to be 40 millimeter at the inner side over here, it is going to be 10 millimeters. Okay. So let's start creating those. So what I will do, I will create a spline. Okay. Let's start it over somewhere over here. Somewhere here would be nice. It can be any location or let's create them over here so that we can see them better. Okay. First of all, let's click on this circle and we will create external reference geometry. Click on this external reference geometry and click on this circle. Now, select the spline tool and start crecting this curve from this location. And it would be something like this. This curve handle would be somewhere in the middle and then somewhere over here outside of this opening. Okay. This outer portion like this. Then press cap to finish that curve, presses. Then we will create the second curve somewhere over here, right next to it, and it is going to have the same profile as well. Okay. Now, scap twice to exit out of this plan tool. And let's start moving these to create the shap basically. Something like this, then you simply have to select the dimension tool, select this point, the end points of both of these curves, and this distance is going to be 40 millimeters. Similarly, the distance between the starting points of these two curves is going to be 10 millimeters. Type ten, press okay. Okay. Now let's create a line and join these two lines so that we can apply features to this geometry. Okay, let's press close. So here we have the sketch. Okay. Let's pad it, click on the pad feature. Okay, so the wire is not closed, meaning the sketch is not closed. So we will simply have to go back to model under this geometry, click on this sketch once again, and basically we will inspect it. So there is no portion over here. Okay. So what we can do, we can simply create a circle. Okay? Create a circle just like this circle. Okay? Starting it over here, ending over here. We have already created the reference geometry, so it would be very easy to just create a circle and its diameter should be up to this point. Okay. So now we have the circle, but we only need this portion from this point to this point. We don't need this entire circle over here. So for that, we have the trim tool. So select this trim tool and basically trim out. We can either trim it over here, but that would be pointless, so trim it over here. I will cut it from this point going all the way to this point. Okay? So let's click on that. It's not removing, so it has removed, but there are some portions still remaining. It is giving us a lot of errors. Okay. So I think what I will do, I will press controls it, controls it, controls it, and now the circle is there again. Ignore all of these. Okay. So here is the circle. So I will simply delete this circle. We basically have to join these two surfaces together. Okay. And we can do it by simply creating a body somewhere something like this. Okay? So create a line. Here, then from here to here and then basically join this to this point. Since whatever we pad how much we pad on this surface. This portion over here, it is going to be inserted right inside this already created geometry. So it would not make any difference. We can create geometry, something like this over here and then use the pad feature again on it. It would not make any difference because that additional padding would be fused with this cylindrical padding that we have already created. Okay. So over here, it does not really matter, but it ensures that the surface right now is an enclosed surface. Okay? And we can basically use pad features on it. Let's press close. Now the sketch looks something like this. It is enclosed. So we can use the pad feature, so click on pad and yes, we can use the pad feature, but it is going to be in the downward direction because we want it to be just level with this cylinder, this disc basically. So its length would be 15 because that is the height of those gaps, and I will reverse it. Press Okay. Now let's go to top view, and this is the portion that we have just created. This pad is this portion. This final pad, zero, zero, four. Okay. But we want this portion over here, over here, here, here, all over this geometry because there are going to be vents everywhere, not just over here. Okay. And for that, once again, you have the feature called polar pattern. This one. Select that once again, it is going to be around base Z axis. It is creating another copy over here. So let's start increasing the number. Obviously, it is going to be 360 degrees. So right now it is three, one, two, three, one went over here, one went over here, one went over here. Let's keep on increasing. Okay. And eventually it will be a bit difficult to evaluate or a bit time consuming to evaluate and create for the free kid. So let's keep on increasing. So currently it is 14 vents. Let's keep increasing more, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19. I think 19 is enough. Press, and we now have this geometry. Now what we are going to do, let's change the view again to flat lines. Okay, so we will have to simply select this body and change to flat lines again. This body, double click on that, change the view to flat lines, shaded or flat lines. So currently it is shaded, I'll change it to flat lines. Okay. Now what we're going to do, this is the disc body, and this is the body, and I'll just rename it to vents. Okay. So now what we're going to do, we are going to subtract this vents body from this this body. And basically, it will remove the material from the positions inside this disc body where the regions which are common between this disc body and went body, creating those gaps. So let's do it. Okay. First of all, we will have to position it correctly. So for example, if I look at the right from the front view, it is right over here, but we want it somewhat above this bone. Okay? So every click on this vent body, right click and click on transform. Okay. So the distance between this point and this point is 10 millimeters. So transform increment should be ten. Let's move it upward by one. Okay. That is perfect because the increment over here is ten, and we have only lifted it by singular movement, basically, meaning it has been lifted. This entire geometry has been lifted upward or transformed in the upward direction by 10 millimeters, which directly puts it at its appropriate position. Okay? Press. Okay. And now we are going to be using the Boolean features. Okay. So first of all, what you need to do, you need to know basically is know about active and inactive bodies. So right now, let me turn on the magnifier. I'll close this. Okay, let me turn on the magnifier. Okay. So if I zoom over here, you have the disc body and the vent body. But as you can see the disc body is highlighted as well as its name is in bold, whereas the vent party is not bold. This basically means that disc party is the active body, meaning the disc body is the body on which we can now just directly go over and create sketches, et cetera, or it is basically, according to free ket, it is the body we are working on right now. If you click on right click on this vent party, here is uh, here it is written, active body, and next to that, we have a box which is tick mark, meaning it is active body. Then you have this vents body. If you right click on that, the tick mark is not present in the box right next to active body, meaning it is inactive body. Okay. So that is the difference between active and inactive bodies. Now, understanding the difference between an active body and inactive body is necessary because when you carry out a boolean operation, two or more bodies are going to be converted into one body. Okay. So whether you choose any one of the three features, fuse cut or common features, these are the three features present in the boolean feature. Whichever you choose, initially, at the start of that boolean operation, there are going to be more than one bodies. And at the end, there is going to be only one body. Okay? And whatever that one body you want there to be should be the active body. For example, if we want the vents to survive after carrying out this process of boolean, then we should make this vents body as our active body. Similarly, if you want a disk to survive, the disc should be our active body and we want the disc to survive after carrying out the operation. We want to subtract this vents body from this disc body, not the other way around. Meaning the final body should be the disc body, and therefore that should be our active body. So right now it is our active body. So basically, deselect everything, so everything is deselected. So you do have this green highlight over there, but that basically suggests that it is an active body. It does not mean that it is selected. Blue highlight means that body is certainly selected. Okay, so I will unselect it once again by left clicking over here, and over here, we have boolean operations. Okay. So left click on that. And you might have noticed that the active body, which was the disc has been disappeared. It's gone. Okay. So that basically suggests that our selected active body was the correct. We corrected we selected the correct body. Right now, over here, you will have to select whatever you want to add, fuse or create common geometry between to that active body. Okay. So obviously, active body we cannot add the active body to the active body. That is why it has disappeared. And right now we can select only those bodies we want boolean operations to be applied to the bodies we want added to the active body or seirected from the active body. Okay? And what we are going to do, we're going to click on this add body over here, and that body is going to be obviously this body. So just simply click anywhere. And now our body has returned. Okay. So over here, you have three options. Currently, it is set to fuse. If you left click on that, you have fuse cut and common. Fuse is basically going to merge different bodies together. Okay. So right now, if I click, Okay, over here, as you can see, there is only one body now. There is this disc body and under that disc body, we have the boolean operation, and then inside that boolean operation, we have the parameters for that vent body. But overall, we only have one body. Meaning we have added that vent body to this disc body. Okay, but that is not what we want, so I will simply press Control Z, go back to Bolan, add body, select this body. Okay. The other option is common, which is, as you can see, it is going to create common material or it is only going to leave the regions which are common between these two geometries. However, there is a condition for it. For example, if I click on select the common and click Okay, it is going to give us an error, 22. Day 17: Assemblies - Gear & Shafts Assembly: So this is going to be the second lecture for assembly, and overall, it is going to be our 17th project. And in this project, we are going to be creating this gear shaft assembly. We have two shafts, and on those two shafts, we have gears mounted on top of it. So we are going to be creating this assembly. So there will be rotating once we have created the assembly, but sometimes it is a bug in free cat that if you create an assembly, everything is moving, everything is functioning, then you save the file and you open it again and it might be that the gears are no longer moving, but the assembly is overall perfectly correct. Okay. So what I'm just going to do, I'm going to close this, okay. These are the files of different parts in that assembly as well. Okay? So for parts, I have already created the models for these parts. Here they are. Okay? So we have gear one, Gear two, and we have Shaft one and Shaft two. These four parts will be provided to you with this lecture under the resource section. Okay. So I will just go to free gad and create a new assembly. I'm not going to model those parts because they're going to be included in the resource section. However, if you still want to create it, here we have the dimensions. The shaft one is going to be 50 millimeter diameter shaft two with 60, and you can just pick their length arbitrarily hundred, 120 depends up to you. That is your choice. It doesn't really matter. Then we have the gear. You can simply use the Gear value tool. We have learned how to create gears, so it's going to be the only parameters you need to enter are going to be module. For gear one, that module is 3.33 and number of teeth is going to be 30. And for G two, you will enter the model of six and number of teeth to be 20. That is, if you want to model them yourselves. So however they will still be included in the resource. You can simply download them and use them in your assembly. Okay. So now let's start creating the assembly. So obviously, we will create a new assembly document. Okay. Then we will add more components. So we will click on this button, Insert component, Enter. Then we will open file to open to basically browse to the component folder and then insert the part files. So I have them over here and desktops you can put them wherever you want. So I'm going to be including gear one, Gear two, Shaft one and Shaft two. So this file is basically the file of the assembly that I've just created that I showed you in the beginning of this lecture. Okay, so I'm not going to include that because that is an assembly document. Okay. So gear one, gear to shaft one and Shaft two, insert them into this assembly file, and then obviously we will have to save our assembly assembly document so that we can insert components into it. I will simply press Control S, and let's call it gear shaft assembly. Okay, ***. You can write whatever you want. Okay. So now we just simply need to insert our components. So first, I will insert the shafts. You can insert the gear as well, but let's insert the shaft one. Simply we will left click on shaft one. Here it is, the body of shaft one. Okay. Here it is, we can move it around, but let's just keep it over here. Left click over here, and now it is install or inserted into our assembly. Then select Shaft two. Move it somewhere over here. Let me move it over here. Then gear one. Here it is gear one. Move it over here, then gear. Two and then move this. I'll just move this over here. This small gear will be mounted on top of this shaft. This large gear will be mounted on this shaft, and then there will be connected in an assembly. The teeth of both of these gears are going to be matted. Okay, let's press. Okay. So you might have noticed that there is no fixed geometry or fixed body right now, or anchor body. And that is because there is no fixed body. We cannot select any one of these joints. The only joint we can currently carry out or use is going to be this toggle grounded or fixed. So we will have to max certain geometries grounded. And what I'm going to do, I will click on this toggle grounded. Okay, here, toggle grounded, or we have to select the geometry and then click on Toggle grounded to make it grounded. So simply click on this geometry, this shaft, click Toggle grounded, and now you have the lock sign over here. We cannot move it and it is grounded. Now we can use these other joints as well. So first of all, let's mount this gear on top of this shaft. So obviously, we will want this gear to be mounted on the shaft and it should be able to rotate. Moving it up and down is not requirement. If we require the up and down motion as well, we would have created this joint, cylindrical joint. But we don't mount that, we only want rotation, so our joint would be revolute joint. So what I will dock on this revolute joint. Zoom in a bit select this surface, and this would be mated to this surface. Okay. So the gear has been connected. If you want to move it up and down to put it at a certain specific location, we can do that too. But let's just keep it at zero. Okay. Press Okay. Now we can rotate the gear and it is mounted on top of this shaft. Now let's do the same thing to this gear. Okay. Once again, revolute joint, this surface and this surface. Perfect. Click Okay. So both gears are mounted on their respective shafts and we can move them around. However, we can rotate this gear, but we cannot rotate this gear. Okay? If we try to the whole shaft along with the gear moves. That is because this shaft is not fixed. Okay. So now what we need to do first, we need to put this shaft at its appropriate location. Okay? So to ensure that first create a parallel joint, create a parallel joint between this surface and this surface. The top surfaces of the shafts. Okay. Let's click Okay. Where did the shaft go? Okay. So here it is. Now, after creating that parallel joint, as you can see, between this surface and this surface, we can rotate this gear as well. The reason we created that parallel joint is to make sure that this surface in this surface is parallel, meaning the shafts are aligned. They're not at a certain angles from one another. Now, if you look at it from top view, we can see that the shafts are perfectly aligned. Now let's just select this shaft, select it and move it inwards and put the, the teeth of the gear at their somewhat appropriate location, something like this. Okay. Okay? Let's zoom out a bit, go to front view, and they are not perfectly aligned. So now let's move this up a bit and like this. Okay. Well, let's go to top view. We simply have to align everything for now. Okay? So let's move them something like this. So these teeth are perfectly meshing or matting with one another. Okay. Now we are ready to create gear joint. Now if you rotate this one, as you can see, this one rotates, but the other one is not rotating. There is no collision defined between these two gears. I will once again have to correct the like this. Perfect. Everything is in its place to isometric view. Now let's start creating the gear joint. Okay. But before doing that, to make sure that we accidentally not move this shaft away. Let's simply click on this shaft and make it grounded or fixed as well. Now, this shaft cannot move, this shaft cannot move, but these gears can rotate, but I'm not going to do that because if we do it, we will have to fix their positioning once again manually. Okay. But they can still rotate, but the shafts cannot be moved. Now we will have to create the gear joint. Before creating gear joint, let's just hide these two shafts. Click on this shaft. Space bar, and it is hidden or its visibility is turned off. Same thing with the other shaft, selected. Space bar, it is hidden. Okay. But there are still shafts, as you can see from these lock signs. Now let's go to this option. The last option, expand it, and here we have two kind of joints. We have gear joints and back joints. We want to create a gear joint, obviously, we will click on this one. Okay. Then you simply have to click select the internal surface or these edges of both of these gears. Okay? So the first gear the first surface, the internal surface of the gear you select first would be over here under radius one, and the second one would be radius two. I will talk about what this radius actually is. So we will select this surface. So that is gear one selected, then we select this gear that is gear two selected. Okay. Now let's talk about this radius one and radius two. This is basically asking the free cat is basically asking us for the pitch radius or pitch radii of both of these gears. Okay. And we know that the diameter of gear one is 100 millimeters, so its pitch radius would be 50 millimeters, half of that diameter. Similarly, the diameter pitch diameter of c two, the larger gear is 120 millimeter, so its radius would be 60 millimeter. Okay. So radius one would be 50 millimeters and just make sure that you are working in millimeters, which we are. So it would be 50 millimeter, and then radius two would be 60 millimeter. Okay. Now if you want to reverse the rotation of direction, we can uncheck it or just leave it checked. Okay. Now, the radius is selected, press. Okay. Okay, the joint has been created. Now let's turn on the visibility of the shafts once again. So we have this pad. This is the shaft, selected space bar. That shaft is shown. Is visibility has been turned on, and then we have this pad over here. Okay. And next to that, let me turn on the magnifier. Okay. Here, as you can see, this button, we have this visibility symbol. Okay? So this packet is turned on. It is for the gear, but this pad is turned off, basically. To turn it on, we can either click on this visibility icon over here or we can select it and press pass bar. Okay. Okay. So go over here and we have this pad over here. Okay. Let's turn it. So this pocket let's turn this pocket on. Let's turn this pad. Okay. So where is this shaft? It is body one, yes, it is over here. Okay, here. So its visibility has been turned off. Okay. Now, for example, this body 003 is actually this larger gear. Okay. And while creating it, we first created the sketch, then we padded it upwards, which is this pad feature added over here, and then we had to create the whole through the middle of this gear, and that is the packet. Okay. So let me just turn off the visibility of the shaft again. Okay. So currently, it is showing us this pocket. However, if I turn down this pad, which is before creation of this hole, which is the pocket feature, if I turn it on, as you can see over here, the hole disappears. Okay. That is because it is currently right now showing this body 003, which is this gear only up to this paired feature. It is not showing us this pocket feature, and we should turn this on as well. Now it is showing everything. Okay. Similarly, this body 001 is the second shaft. It only has a paired feature. There is no holes in it, and there are no other features applied to it. Okay? So let's press. Click on this visibility icon to turn its visibility on. So now we have the gear joint created, so let's test it out. If I select this gear and move it around, as you can see, the second gear is rotating as well. This is basically how you can create gear joints. If you move this one around, the other one will rotate as well as you can see that if you rotate one gear in anti clockwise direction, the other will rotate in clockwise direction. For example, let me rotate this one in Sorry clockwise direction, as I'm rotating it right now, the second gear is rotating. In antiglockwise direction. And that is basically how gears work. Now you can connect another gear over here, create the joint, create gear joint with that gear as well. Then if you rotate this one, that gear two will rotate and then consequently gear three will rotate as well. And you can create large assemblies basically using this practice and these techniques involving gears. So this is all for this lecture. Thank you. 23. Day 18: Assemblies - Gear & Rack Assembly: So this is going to be the 18th project of this course and third project in the assembly section of this course. And after that, we will move on to finite element analysis and other types of engineering simulations. In this project, we will be creating this gear and rack assembly or rack and pinion assembly. Okay. So this assembly has three parts. We have this bass, this gear, and this rack. This gas and this bass was modeled using traditional CAD modeling techniques, then this gear was created using envolteGear tool, and this is actually the same gear A which we used in the previous lecture for gear shaft assembly. It is the gear A from that lecture. Then we have this rack. Now, there is no direct option like creating this gear. There is no direct tool using which we can create this gear, this rack. You cannot create a rack by using the same nvalueGear tool, which we have used for creating this. Here. Okay, so there are two options for creating this wreck. The first option is to just model it, create a sketch, and then use any features like pad, et cetera. Okay. The second option is using an add on, and that is exactly what I have done. Okay? So I will just close it, close this one, close this one, so all of these parts. So I've just gone to add ons, and there is an add on which can really help in creation of gears. Okay. And it is this one. Gears workbench. Okay. So I've already installed it, so I recommend you install it as well. And once it is installed, it is going to ask you to restart free cat, you do that, and then it would be ready to use. Okay. So before creating that assembly, let's have a quick overview of how this add on works. So let's create a parametric part file and change the workbench from part design to gear. Okay. So this gear workbench, it kind of elevates the capabilities of free gear to model gears. Using the built in volute gear tool which you used in the previous lecture, you can create normal spur gears. However, if you want to create other types of gears like worm gears, racks, internal gears, et cetera, you don't have any built in option. Okay. And this gear workbench allows you to create those different types of gears as well. For example, we have this normal normal value gear. Okay, it is going to be spar gear. We can also create internal envelope gear. We can also create wreck. We can create cycloid gear, cycloid wreck, bevel gear, crown gear, worm gear, and all different types of gears. Okay. And to create it, let's say if I create a normal envelope gear, which you can do by using the enveloped gear tool already present in fricat, let's just see how it carries out. So you simply left click and there we have our gear. Just create it, then we will move on to model. And over here, we have this enveloped gear. So in a way, it kind of did the same thing of using that same enveloped gear tool. Now you can click on it, select it, go over here to its property over here, and here you can select all of its properties a tandem, angular back, pitch diameter, root dimeter transverse and all other values. Okay. You can select everything over here. Okay, or if you double click. Okay. So we cannot access the enveloped gear tool because we are not in we are in part design, gear works not in part design workmen. Okay. So here we have a body which is this gear. And let's say if I click on it and delete it, that gear is gone. Then let's say I want to create an internal gear. Let's create that. And once again, here we have internal enveloped gear, and over here we have different properties for that as well. So we have num points this is basically it denotes the accuracy of how accurate this shape is going to be if you try to three D print or something, then you have the height, which is going to be this height, padding basically, then you have the module of the gear, number of teeth, thickness, all of the values you can insert. So that is how you can create nvalute gear. But we want to create this envole rack. Okay? So I've just created this nvalue rack to edit its parameters, I will simply select it, go over here. Okay. Here we can select its height, its module, number of teeth, and thickness, et cetera. Okay, so I'm not going to change anything except module. Okay? Or gear, which has already been created which you've used in the previous lecture, it has the module of 3.33 millimeters. Okay. And for a gear and for a rack and pinion assembly to basically work, the module of the rack and the gear needs to be somewhat close. Okay? So I will just make it exactly the same. 3.33 plus enter, now we have our rag with a module of 3.33 millimeter module. Okay. So that is how you can create this rack. I've already created it and the files will be provided to you along with this lecture under the resource section. So let's just move on to creating assembly. So click on Assembly, create a new assembly document, and let's insert parts. Okay. Go to Insert components, click on Open File. Move to navigate to the location where you have stored all the files, so it is going to be this one. So there are going to be three parts. This file is actually the assembly which I created previously, which I showed at the beginning of this lecture. So there is going to be this bass, gear, and rack. Okay, let's add those three, press open. Okay. And these three files will be provided to you with this lecture. So I'll just mention it again. I've showed you how you can model it by choosing the work pen, but you don't need to if you don't want to. Okay, so you can just chooe these files as well. So let's just include the base. Okay. So I will have to save it. I will just save it as gear g as M. Okay. Let's save it, and here we have the base. Okay. Then let's bring in our gear. Here we have the gear. Okay. And then we have the rag. Okay, let's rotate it and move it upwards as well. It's proper orientation. Let's press. Okay. So the first thing is that we need to have a grounded part and it is going to be this bass. So let's click on it and click on this toggle grounded. Let's make it grounded. Or you can simply press Ghatkey and now it is grounded. Okay. Now let's put this gear on top of this shaft, so we will create a revolute joint, which is this one. This surface will go over this surface. Okay. And it is not really doing well. It is going inside. We can move it out by using this offset, but there is a better way to do it. Okay. So I will just close I will once again create a revolute joint. But instead of selecting this internal surface and this outer surface of this shaft, I will select this circular edge on the gear and this circular edge on the shaft. And that places the gear right on top of this plate basically, right at the beginning of the shaft. Press Okay. Rotate it, yes, we can rotate. Okay. So the gear is mounted perfectly. Now, this rack is going to be placed over here, and it is going to be allowed to slide over this edge. Okay, because it is going to be moving left and right. Okay. And for that, we have a joint since we need sliding on this surface. So we will create a sliding or slider joint. Okay? So let's create it. Let's select this edge. Okay, this edge and let's move over here and select this edge. Now it is over there. Let's see if we can slide it, we can slide it, but its direction is not proper. What we will do, we will go over here under the parameters, we have rotation. I will simply rotate it by 90 degrees. Once we do it, it is in its proper direction. Press now we can slide it like this. Now let's create the joint. Okay. So let's rot it, something like this. First, we will have to position the teeth of the gear and the rack perfectly. Let's say something like like this. Then we will create the pinion rack and pinion join. Now, once we do it, there is going to be a problem. And let's just create it and we will address the problem later. So we need rack and pinion join. Let's create it. There is going to be we first have to select the gear, the internal surface of the gear, and this one of the edge on the pinion. Okay. So let's select this surface of the gear, internal edge of the gear, and let's close it first and select this best, pre best to hide it so that we accidentally do not create a rack and pinion joint between the shaft and this rack. To avoid it, let's just hide the best momentarily. Let's once again click on this rack and pinion joint. It is over here. This one. Oops. Let's select this rack and pinion gear. Then we will select this edge and this edge. Or we can rather select this surface and the surface as well. The effects are going to be sand. Okay? So I will select this circular edge of this gear and this edge of this pinion. Okay? So now previously when we created joints between two gears, we had over here, we had two radiuses or two radii, and they were asking us the fret was asking us for the pitch radius of both of those gears. This time, one is opinion. It has no radius. It has infinite radius, and there is only one gear. So we will provide the pitch radius of this gear only, and that is 50 millimeters. So 50 plus. Okay. Now, let's go over here, click on this pad and turn on the visibility of bass. Okay. So now, if we click on this gear and rotate it, as we can see, sorry, if we slide it, we can see that the gear is rotating as well. If we go in this direction, the gear moves in the opposite direction. Okay. So now, if we rotate, sorry, not rotate, if you slide this wreck from this right side to this left side in this direction which is negative X direction, if we move it in that direction, the gear should be rotating in clockwise direction. And let's check that if it is happening, yes, it is going in that direction. Okay. And if you slide this g along the X axis from this left side to right side, the gear should rotate in anti clockwise direction. Let's see. And as you can see, and yes, that is happening. Okay. And you can see it is evident that the gear is not rotating in its proper direction. Okay? If I move to the right, the gear should be moving in it is going right. Okay. Okay, so it is moving in its accurate direction. Okay? Moving right, the gear goes anticlockwise, moving left, the gear goes clockwise. However, it might be possible that that is not the scars for you. So sometimes in free get these directions for this rack and pinion gears are inverted. Okay? So this time it worked perfectly for me. However, if it is not working perfectly for you and the gear is moving in the opposite direction, for example, if you move it to the right side, the gear actually moves in clockwise direction, which is the wrong direction. Okay? And if that is the case with you, all you simply need to do is go over here under joints, Okay. And here we have rack pinion. Okay. Double click on that, and you don't have to double click on that. I'm just clicking it to show what is the error. So here we have pitch radius. Okay. And obviously, the radius has to be positive. The radius cannot be -50. Okay? And if I try to type it, that doesn't really work. I'm pressing the minus sign, minus K, but it is not working. However, the free cat, it determines the direction of the rotation of the gear from this radius. Okay? So if sure direction is invited, it is flipped. All you need to do, click on this rack pinion, single click, not double click and go down to the properties. Okay. And here we have that distance. Okay? It is actually the pitch radius which we entered while creating that RainonGearo, rack and pinion SM joint. Sorry. Okay. So what you need to do if your direction is invited, you double click on this distance, and over here, we can set that pitch radius to be negative. Okay. So if your direction is flipped when you enter, when you create this rack and pinion joint, you need to go over here, click on this distance, and just put a minus next to it. Okay? So right now, for me, the direction is perfectly fine. So if I put -50, which is actually absurd, like, how can there be -50 millimeter radius? But freeke determines direction from that number entered over there, and sometimes it can be helpful to basically solve your problem. So for me, the direction was perfectly fine, but I still changed it to -50, and now for me, the direction would be wrong now. So previously when I moved this rack in the right direction, the gear was moving in anti clockwise direction. But right now, if I move it in right direction, the gear is moving in clockwise direction. Okay. So by controlling the over here, c pinion, changing the symbol of this plus or minus changing the symbol of this Distance, which is actually the pitch radius, you can change the direction of the count clockwise or anticlockwise direction of the gear in which it rotates. Okay. So if the direction is opposite for you, you can change you can just put a minus symbol over there and it will just fix your problem. Okay. So that is how you can create rack and pinion gears. And that is all for this lecture. Thank you. 24. Day 19: FEM - Simply Supported Beam: So this is going to be the 19th project of this course, and from this project or from this lecture, we're going to start carrying out engineering simulations using free care. Okay, so let's first go over what finite element analysis and engineering simulations are carried out. So finite element analysis is basically a technique to carry out engineering simulations. So why do we need it? So for example, let's say, Okay. Let's say you have a body or a problem that is like this. It is a cantilever beam problem. This surface is fixed. Okay. And we have some force acting over here. Let's say 1,000 Newton or 1 kilonewton. Okay. Now if you want to evaluate the deflection or the stresses or another components which are going to be happening in this body under this load, you can do analytical you can implement analytical method, which is basically using the formulas of stresses, et cetera on this body and eventually determining what is going to be the deflection, how much stresses are going to be generated and much, much more. Okay. However, for example, now carrying out this analytical method for this beam is easy. I mean, you can simply, for example, if you look at stress, it is F divided by a force per unit area. You can simply this is the force, calculate the top area and it is this rectangular shape, which is going to be easily determining its area, and you can just directly evaluate its stress. However, what if your body is not this simplistic in shape? For example, if it looks something like this, if you beam, let's look something like this. Then you cannot and the force is being applied all over this portion or there is one force over here, another over here, another over here, another over here, then this side is fixed or this side is fixed. There can be a lot of configurations. Okay. And now doing that for now, using the analytical method using the equations of determining stresses, et cetera, for this kind of shape is very, very difficult. Okay. And that is where finite element analysis or FEA for short comes in. Okay. It can be used for fluid simulations, which then becomes a VM finite volume method. But essentially, it is both of these are basically the work on the same principle overall. Okay. So for this one, what is finite element analysis, what it does instead of applying these kind of equations on this entire body like we can do for this simple beam. Instead, it will divide this body into very small pieces like this, like this. Okay. And those pieces are called as elements. Okay. An. Okay. So originally, let's say you had something a bar or a beam that was like this. Okay. So now with finite element analysis, instead of applying all the equations on this entire body, you will divide it into small elements. And those elements will be separated from one another by nodes. Okay. And these corners are going to be node. This corner over here, another node, another node, another node like this. So if you look at the strat line, there will be one node over here, let's say, another node over here, another over here. Let's put another over here, and now we have another element, then we have another element, then we have another element. Okay. So we have one element two, three, four, five over here, and the six over here. So we have six elements and we have a total of one, two, three, four, five, six nodes. Now, what is finite element analysis does? Instead of applying these equations to this entire body, it is going to apply to these elements, and by elements, we mean it is going to apply it on these nodes. So this method is going to determine stresses on this node, this node, this node, this node, all of these nodes, and then eventually it will merge all of the results together to create basically, it is called a stiffness matrix, so it will create a large matrix and will solve all of that. Okay. And eventually it will output the results. Now, carrying out this operation manually is very, very difficult because there are going to be at times 100,000 millions of nodes. And you cannot just take a piece of paper and pen and determine all of the determine the deflections and stresses, et cetera at all of those nodes. It is going to be extremely time consuming. Okay. That is where computers come in. So computers and computers, we have processors and GPU et cetera, which are very, very efficient and determining. Applying equations on all of these elements and basically outputting the results. Now, the accuracy of these results, these analysis, they will give you a result, but that does not mean it is the accurate result or the actual result. For example, let's delete all this. For example, you have a beam. Looks. Let's turn off the magnifier. For example, you have a beam, like this. You divide it into elements, which is a process called meshing. And the collection of all of these elements is called a mesh. Basically, when you create all of these elements or you create this mesh, you will divide it into many, many small parts, like this. Okay. Let's say you create mesh or you divide this entire geometry into, let's say, 1,000 nodes. Okay, then you carry out the analysis and the stress sigma comes out to be five Gigapasca. Okay. So now you have this result. Now, this is a result, but it is not necessarily the result. Okay. You don't know that it is the actual direct result because the accuracy of this result is going to depend on how fine or how dense the mesh is. Okay. So what you're going to do to determine the accuracy, you first had 1,000 nodes, you again, carry out this analysis. You create another mesh, but this time you have 2000 nodes. Okay. And from these 2000 nodes, let's say the results come out to be five point, let's say two GegaPsker. Okay. Then you carry out the operation once again with 3,000 nodes. Simulation once again. Sorry. And this time, the result comes out to be, let's say, For this time, let's say it is 5.25. This time it is 5.24 ggapsker. Then you carry it again with let's say 4,000 nodes, you're increasing the number of elements, meaning you're making each individual element smaller. So let's say this time, the result comes out to be 5.241 giga basker. Okay, then you carry out once again, then it is 5.24 15 gigabascle. So what is going to happen that with each increase in the density or increase in the number of elements, which is also going to result in increase in number of nodes, Ju results are going to converge on a number. Okay? And if we are to chart this, create a graph out of this, it will look something like this. Okay? So let's say on xs, we have the result. It can be stress, it can be deflection, it can be anything. On X accessory, we have number of nodes. With each increase in number of nodes, u and result is going to be converging toward a singular number. Let's say we don't know yet, but let's just assume the actual result is somewhere over here. Okay. Okay, next to this kind of next to this much this deflection. Let's say this is 100 gigapascal. Okay, let's assume that the actual value is 100 gigapascal. Okay. So when you start your analysis, here you have less number of nodes, then you have more number, more, more, and you keep on increasing the number of nodes. So your results, they might start somewhere over here. So maybe initially with a very few number of nodes, let's say, or very few just let's not put any number, you get 150 gigabkle. Then when you increase the density of the mesh or increase the number of elements, then the next number comes out to be, let's say, 120, then 115, and eventually slowly with each gradual increase in number of elements or the number of mesh, your result will continue to converge on this number. Okay? Now, it does not necessarily will start from the top to bottom. It can go in this direction as well. However, with each increase in number of nodes, it will converge on an actual result. Okay, so in this case, we assume that we assume that the actual result is 100 gigapascal, but in reality, that is not going to be the option. You won't be knowing the actual result because that would just eliminates the need of carrying out this simulation. So what you will do, you will need something called this is not something you carry out in finite free kit, but this is basically the general procedure. This all is a general procedure of carrying out FEA analysis. Okay? So what you will use, you will use something called convergence factor. And it is basically going to be a percentage, and it is the percentage of how much error from the actual value. You don't know the actual value, but how much error or how much convergence factor you can tolerate. Okay? So let's say your convergence factor is 5%. Okay. So now, this means that when the result in the deflection or stress, whatever, let me turn it off. Okay. Whatever numbers you are interested in, whatever quantity you are interested in if the difference in the results is less than 5% for each consecutive mesh refining or with each increase in number of nodes, then you can basically stop and take whatever results you have. Okay. So for example, if the actual result is 100, o on first mesh, you get something like, let's say, 110. Then you carry out the operation once again, you get 102. Now, this is how much difference I think it is at percent difference. Okay? From this value and between this value, the difference is 8%. And you cannot stop the result right now. Let's forget about this. Then you carry out the operation once again and next time your result comes out to be 101. Now the difference 102-101, this result is one person, which is less than your chosen convergence factor. So you can basically just stop over here. And one key thing to remember while carrying out finite element analysis, whether you are carrying them out in fregad or any other software is that when you increase the number of nodes, just accuracy is going to increase, but also the computation time taken by the computer is also going to increase. Okay. So that is all about finite element analysis. Now, how it is carried out in free cat. So this is the path or the procedure of carrying out finite element analysis in free cat or carrying out any engineering simulations. First of all, you will have to create the geometries. You can create it in part workbench, part design workbench, architectural workbench, which we are not going to do in this course, but you can still do that or any other workbench. Basically, you can create you need to create a solid body in any one of these workbenches. We're going to be carrying out in part design workbench. Then after that, you will move over to finite element method workbench or FEM workbench. There we will first have to create an analysis container where we will assign material constraints and loads. So material, meaning what material that solid body is going to be made of, then constraints, it means with pace or the side of this body is fixed and then fixed or moving and all those kind of constraints, then you have loads which are how much force or any other kind of thermal load. It can be thermal load, et cetera. They will be applied. And after applying loads and assigning material, we will move on to creating the mesh, which is basically dividing the entire geometry into small elements with nodes. And there are two mesh creators in free cad. You have the G mesh and Net gen. Both carry out the operation using different kind of parameters, basically, but the end results are mostly the same. Then you have the solver, which is the software actually going to analyze or carry out the simulation. You have calculx Zetiat and Elmer, three solvers in free cad. We are going to be using calculx because it is most commonly used and it is, I think the most accurate. And once the solution, the simulation is carried out, we will move on to plotting and visualization, basically, creating graphs and charts to determine the results. Okay. So now let's go over to free cad and basically carry out a simple finite element analysis. Simulation. Okay. So we will be carrying out a simple simply supported beam simulation. So first of all, we will have to create the beam. It is going to be a very simple beam, so I will create sketch. Let's make it on XYZ plan. Okay? We will create a simple rectangle, Let's make its width to be 20 millimeter and height to be 30 millimeter. Let's press close. Okay. Now, click on this pad feature over here and its length is going to be 250 millimeter. Let's see. That is enough. Let's press Okay. So now we have completed the first step. We have a solid party. Let's move over to let me just turn this off. Okay. Okay. Now let's move over to finite element method, Workbench. Okay. So simply click on this workbench dropdown menu and move over to FE M. Okay. So now we are in finite element method workbench. But you can see, we don't have access to all of these options. They are grade out. To access them, we first have to create click on this button Analysis container, which is basically going to create an analysis container here over here in the model design tree. Okay. And it is basically going to store all of the settings or parameters involved in that simulation. So I left clicked on that, and now we have this Analysis container. And after that, all of these options will become available to you. Okay. Now, the first step, as you can see is assigning the material. To assign the material, you just simply select the body or you don't necessarily have to select the body body. If you have multiple bodies, then you will have to select each one of the individual bodies and then apply material. But here we just have one. So this body does not need to be selected. You simply need to click on this option. Okay, right next to the Okay, right next to this analysis container, this button, material for solid. Okay. So let's left click on that. Okay. And here you can assign your material. You can create a custom material, and for that, you simply have to check this box, use this task panel. And here you can assign your custom values for density, Jung's modulus, poison ratio, and other properties. Okay. That is if you want to use a custom material for this simulation. However, if you don't want that, you simply uncheck this box, click on this button, and here the free gad has a library of a lot of materials. Okay. And what we are going to be using is going to be let's move down. There would be here. Under steel, we have different types of steel, and we are going to be using this calculx steel, which is basically a simple steel or structural steel. Okay. So let's select that and click. Okay. And once we selected this, you can see it has its a lot of properties. Is density is assigned its Jung Modulus, poison ratio, and all of other properties. You can also edit these materials, edit the library of the materials by clicking on this launch editor. And here you can edit any one of these materials from the library present inside. C but that is not recommended. I don't recommend that. For example, if you want to do this, you can simplicl let's say calculic steel and you can change its name, you can change its author, you can change its physical properties, you can change its appearance and all sorts of things. Let's just cancel because I'm not going to do that. It is selected. Move up. Let's say and click. Okay. Now, the material is assigned. Let's move on to the next step. What is the next step, assigning constraints and loads. Let's do that. So constraints and loads are over here. From this point to this point, spring, we have constraints, and from this point to this point, these four, we have forces or loads. And then you have thermal loads over here as well, which we are going to be using in the next lecture. Okay. So since it is a simply supported beam, meaning this edge and this edge are going to be fixed. Okay. So this is the fixed boundary condition. So let's left click on that. Then we simply need to click on this Add button over here, and now once it is pressed, it has a pinkish outline. Now we can select all of the faces or edges we want this constraint to be applied to. So we want this edge. So let's select that. Now it is selected. And let's move around, rotate, and we will select this edge over here as well. So both of these are selected and you have this symbol or notation of fixed support. Let's press. Okay. Now we have our boundary conditions or constraints. Next step is assigning loads. Okay. For assigning loads, we have force load, we have pressure load, we have centrifugal load, and we have gravity. And apart from this fixed support, you have other kind of supports as well. You have rigid body displacement. If something is moving, you have contact, spring, and tire. Okay. So now let's move on to loads. So what kind of load we are going to be implementing, it is going to be force. So we will select force load once again in this task bar. In this panel, we will simply click on Ed and the force is going to be applied in uniformly distributed manner on this top surface. Let's select the top surface, and currently it is going upward direction, which is the wrong direction. So what we will do, we will simply click on this button over here, reverse direction. Now it is going in the downward direction. Okay. However, if you want to assign a complete some other direction like let's say in this horizontal manner along X axis, you can do that as well. For that, you simply need to click on this direction button over here, left click on that, and it says, select an edge or phase. So it is asking us for an edge or pace to align the direction of this force. So what you need to do, let's say you want it along this X axis. So what you will do, you will select this pace this edge over here. So this edge is selected now and click on direction. Now it is in this direction. If you want it in the opposite direction, click on this button and it will change its direction. But we don't want that, so I will just delete it. I will close it and once again, click on this force load, click on Ed the top surface. Let's reverse the direction in the downward direction, and the magnitude is going to be 2 kilonewtons. Meaning it is a newtons so 2000 newtons. Okay. Press. Okay. And we have all of the forces applied as well. Now the next step is generating a mesh. So let's do that. So for generating a mesh, what you need to do, let's first move to isometric view. Okay. First, you will need to select the body. Okay. So the mesh options are over here. You can generate a mesh by Netgen or G mesh. Okay. But these are grade out. You cannot select them. So to enable them, simply select the body, and now both of these options are enabled. Let's create a mesh using NtsGen. Okay. So lets click on that. So here you can select the order of the mesh Order of the element and basically the second order, if you turn this on, your elements are going to be second order, and if you turn this off, it is going to be first order. This basically means that, for example, if you look at over here at the elements here. If the element is a second order element, then it means that there is going to be another node in the middle of the element as well. If it is first order, then the nodes are only going to be at the edges. Meaning if it is second order, there are going to be more nodes and hence higher accuracy. So the size of elements is going to be automatically determined by freekt. We can select the minimum size and maximum size. Let's say we say the maximum size is 100 millimeters. The smaller this number is going to be more finer or more denser your mesh is going to be and hence you will have more nodes and higher accuracy. But on the negative side of that, the con of that is that the processing power or the time required for the analysis is also going to be higher. Okay. So let's select harder. 1000100 to be maximum size, click Apply. And here we have our mesh. Okay. And you can see the stats of this mesh over here. You have the node count, you have the triangle count and tetrahedron counts. So we have 92 triangular elements, 91 tetrahedral elements and 53 nodes. So for example, right now, if I make this make size to be 50, change it to 50 and then click on Apply once again. Okay. Now, once again, this is 53. So according to free cat, this mesh is appropriate enough. However, if we look at click this second order, which means it is going to insert nodes at the middle of elements as well. So nod count should increase. So let's turn this on and click Apply. Now we have 242 elements, 42 nodes, sorry. Okay. Meta triangles and the tetrahedrons are the same. Okay. You can also create make the mesh very finer, but you click on changing this Finness option a. Well, let's make it very fine. Now click Apply. Now we have 217 nodes. The nodes are less, but we have increased the number of triangles. Okay. So usually in my practice, it is better to leave this at moderate. Okay? And let's click. Okay. Let's keep it at 50. Okay. Click Okay, and now we have a mesh. Next, we need to carry out the analysis. Okay. And we will do it by using the calculx analysis. Calclx solver basically. Okay. So for that, you simply need to click on this big S over here. Okay. So it is solver calculEtendd, simply click on that. And after that, if you expand it down, after clicking it, you will see this solver CCX tools over here, which is basically this solver which we have just created by click on this a button. Okay. So double click on that. And here you will select the type of analysis you are carrying out, whether you're carrying out static analysis, thermomechanical buckling frequency or just checking the mesh. Okay, we're going to be carrying out static, so just keep on static and keep this working directory to be default. So what is now going to happen that fricat is going to create input file where it is going to store all of these constraints and these loads applied and the mesh settings for this analysis. Okay. So you will have to write it, and it is going to store it in this working directory, but it is going to be temporary. Okay? So let's just click on write Dart I NP or input file. So it checked its dependencies and the write is complete. It only took less than 1 second. Okay? So now everything is ready, let's press. So if we don't need to press close, after writing the input file, simply click on this button. Run calculus. Okay, press, click on this button. Now, as you can see over here, where was it here? So calculx first started, then it was running and then it stopped. So basically, in 1.1 second, as you can see, over here, calculx done without error. Okay? So in 1.1 seconds, this analysis was carried out and we have these results shown over here as well. Now let's move on to extracting or visualizing the results. Click close. And now we have these three options over here as well. CCX results, CCX Dat file, this is basically the data file for these results, and then you have the pipeline CCX results. Okay. So this pipeline CCX results is basically the visual representation of the bodies you are seeing right here, this legend over here as well as this body. Okay? So you can simply double click on it, and currently it is on surface mode. I like to change it to nord mode. Okay. Sorry, outline mode. Basically, it is going to show us the initial the outline of the original geometry, and then we can basically we can easily see with that option set, we can easily see the results and different values of deflection stresses on this body. So if you don't, if you keep it on surface, what is going to happen, as you can see, it is grade out. So it is going to be free cad is going to be showing us the results as well as the body right on top of one another, and it becomes very difficult to see or observe the actual results. So let's change it to outline. Click Okay. And head over to CCX results. Now, if you want to turn off the visibility of the mesh or these constraints, you can just simply turn off their visibility by clicking these buttons. This is the fixed support constraint. You can turn it off and it basically disappears. You can also hide this force constraints, the symbol for that, the representation for that or you can also turn off the mesh. So right now, when I turned off the mesh, we are only seeing the outline of the body. Okay. So now if you click on this double click on this CCX results, let's do that. And here, we can evaluate different quantities. So for example, we have displacement magnitude, which is deflection. Who you select that. Here, we can see the different deflections of this body. So this is the maximum value. This is the minimum value, and the maximum deflection occurs right in the middle of the beam. And that is basically the correct observation because it's a simply supported beam, and it is going to deflect right in the middle the most. Now what is that maximum deflection? Over here, you can see, it is 18.95 micrometers. It is very small deflection. You can also animate or visualize the reflection by clicking on this button. Just click on this checkbox, which says show and then move around. Okay. And it is very, very small, but if you notice the beam is deflecting when you increase when you move this slider to this side. Okay. So this is obviously an exaggerated animation, but it is basically showing how the body is going to behave or how the deflection is going to look like. Okay. And the magnitude is 18.95. So we need to remember this 18.95. Okay? Let's write it over here. Create a new slide. Let's just type it over here, 18.95 95 micro meter. Just don't's smoother. Okay. Okay. You can also visualize displacement in X direction, Y direction, and X axis, and also C, determine the quantity or the magnitude of that deflection in each one of these axes as well. So in Y axis, it is 266.45 nanometers. In Z, it is 1.92 nanometer like very, very small number, and in X, it is 4.60 micrometer. Okay, you can see the one miss stresses. The maximum stress is 18 megapascal, minimum is at 196 kilopascal, maximum principal stresses, minimum principle, and all other properties as well. Now, this was a static structural analysis. So these options like mass fluate, equivalent plastic strand, temperature, et cetera, are not available. Okay. So here you can basically evaluate the results, and you can basically see what the results are by double clicking on this CCX results. Now for this mesh, let's double click on this mesh. We had 242 elements, and the maximum deflection given by free cad was 18.95 micrometer. Okay. Now, let's say you want to carry out this analysis once again, but with a much more finer mesh with more elements. Okay. So let's do it. For that, let's close. Let's turn on the visibility of the mesh. And first of all, what you need to do, you need to delete or purge all of these results calculated right now. For that, you have a button over here. Okay. It says purge results. So simply left click on that. Now it has deleted all of the results and we can once again carry out another analysis. Okay, so let's do that. Let's select double click on this fine mesh or mesh net chin or mesh. And this time, let's make the max size to be five. Okay. So this is going to be a comparatively very, very denser mesh, click on Apply. Now we have 8,891 nodes. Previously, we had something like 200 and something. Okay. And as you can see from the visibility over here, it is shown the mesh shown over here. The mesh is very, very dense. Okay, so this is 8,000, but most of the time when you're doing carrying out actual simulations, this node count and triangle count or the total element count is going to be in the millions. Okay. So previously, we had something like 242 nodes, and our result was 18.95 micrometer. So now we have increased greatly increased the number of nodes or the mesh density. So let's press Okay, click on this solver CCX tools. Okay, input file once again. It is completed, and this time it took a lot more than that. It took 0.3 seconds. And now let's run the analysis by clicking on this run calculus. And this time the time is going to be higher. So previously it was 1.3 seconds. So right now this analysis was carried out in 1.9 seconds. So the time taken was increased because the mesh is now much, much denser. So let's click close. Okay, so click on the CCX results. Okay. So right now, if you click on this displacement, the maximum displacement is 22.13 micrometer. How much is it? It is 2,222.13. Okay. And unit is again micrometer. Okay. So let's very quickly. Let's click Close and purge all the results once again, double click on the mesh, and let's make this two millimeter. Okay, Max size. Make the mesh even more denser. Click Apply. And let's see. Now we have 145,119 nodes. Okay. So let's carry out the analysis with these. This mesh, once again, click on the solar CCX tools, write the input file. Okay, and run calculus. So it is running. This time, it is going to take a lot longer, 4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds. Let's see how much longer it takes. This is going to be also depending on the speed of your CPU. If you have a faster CPU, the time taken is going to be very, very low. And if you have a low CPU with low speed or low clock speed basically, like an old processor like RI three, et cetera, fast gen or second engine, then it is going to be really, really long. So 34 seconds how much longer is it going to take? Let's just wet a couple of seconds. I'll just skip forward to the point when this analysis has been completed. Okay, so it took something like 110 seconds to carry out this analysis, and that is because the number of elements, number of nodes was in thousands, 100,000, something like that. Okay, so let's press close, click on double click on the CCX results once again. And this time, the maximum deflection is 23.26. How much? 23.26. So now, as you can see, we like from this analysis to this analysis, we basically increased the number of nodes by like ten times. Okay. But going to this one, we once again double the number of nodes. And if you continue. So if you continue carrying out this simulation with a finer mesh, these results are going to be converging at a single number. Okay. That number is going to be the correct number, but you will most likely never reach that actual number. Okay, you will always be hovering around Jure actual results, but you will never come right on top of that. That is something that does not happen in numerical analysis. Okay. So this basically means that whatever the actual result is, this result 23.26 is more closer to the actual result than compared to these two results. And this result is more closer to that actual result than this result. Okay. So if you want to carry out this analysis, once again, the more denser you max your mesh, the more closer you are going to be approaching or converging on that actual result. Okay, let's say you carry out the analysis once again and the result comes out to be 23.23. Now, that error is very, very small, it is 0.03 micrometer. And it is basically depending on your analysis or depending on your study, if that amount of deflection or that amount of error is negligible, then you can basically ignore it. Okay, and just carry on with the result. So this is basically how finite element analysis is carried out in free care. Thank you. 25. Day 20: FEM - Cantilever Beam: So this is going to be the die 20 or the 20th project of this course. And it is going to be, once again, like the previous one, it is going to be a finite element problem project. And we are going to be carrying out an analysis on a cantilever beam. So as you know, first of all, like we have discussed in the previous lecture, the first thing that we need to carry out or do is to create a geometry. So I will create a new parametric part free kat document, and we will just go on to create a geometry. So I will keep the mits to be in millimeter. So I have already created a body, so go to tasks and we have to create a sketch. So let's create a sketch. So once again, I'm going to be selecting the right plan, meaning XYZ plan for this one. And it is going to be a simple rectangle. Okay? So we'll create a rectangle. Its length is going to be 30 millimeter and height is going to be 10 millimeters. Okay, press close. Now we need to use the pad feature to create a cantilever beam basically, and we will use the pad feature, click on this pad, and its length is going to be 500 millimeters, meaning half a meter. Okay. So it is going to be a very long B. Okay, suppress. Okay. You can create whatever shapes you like, these dimensions and the magnitude of loads, et cetera, don't really matter because the purpose of these lectures is to teach you how to carry out or learn how to carry out finite element analysis. So we have the body. So let's simply we can now move on to finite element method workbench FM workbench. Let's click on that to open it. And here we are in the FM workbench. And the first thing, as we've discussed in the previous lecture, to carry out an analysis, we have to create an analysis container. Okay. So let's do it. Let's create a container. Now the next step is to assign material. Let's just move over to the model tab. Here we have the analysis and we will create material. Okay. So let's create the material. And once again, we will choose our material. We will not create a custom material. So this option over here will stay unchecked and we will select once again Calculx steel or we can select any other material. Let's select something else. Let's select generic aluminum. Okay. So let's select that double and click Okay. Now the material has been selected. Next thing we need to do is to assign boundary conditions. So this is going to be a cantilver beam, so either this end or this end over here needs to be fixed. Okay. So we will choose this constraint or fixed boundary condition. Then rotate a bit and we will make this phase fixed. Okay. So click on Add over here to add all of the surfaces which are going to be fixed, click Add, and it is going to be this surface. Okay. So now we have the representation that the surface is fixed or the fixed boundary condition. Fixed surface boundary condition has been applied to this surface. Express, Okay. That is the only constraint or boundary condition there is going to be. The rest are going to be loads. So first, we will create a force load, this one, on this force load, add, and the surface this load is going to be applied on is going to be this surface. Okay. Once again, that direction is in the upward direction, which is wrong, so we will have to reverse it, and the magnitude is going to be 4 kilonewtons, meaning, and over here, as you can see, it is in Newton. So 4 kilonewtons would be 4,000 newtons. Okay, so type 4,000 and click Okay. Now, apart from that load, we will have to insert we are going to add another load as well. Once again, it is going to be force load, and we will click on add and it is going to be over here, this edge. Okay? So there is also going to be a point load at this edge as well. Once again, we will have to reverse the direction because it is also going to be in the downward direction, but as you can see, it is not in its accurate direction. Okay. So let's just turn off this reverse direction. And since this is not a surface, this load is on the edge, so we will have to manually specify its direction. Okay. So we will click on direction. Okay, so we will have to select an edge or a face. We want the direction of this force along this surface, or along this vertical edge. Okay. So its direction is going to be along this edge, but it is going to be applied over here on this edge. So we will select this edge, left click to select, then click on direction. Now it is in downward direction. Okay, that is perfect. If you click on reverse, now it is in upward direction. So uncheck this reverse box, reverse direction checkbox and its magnitude is going to be 1.5 kilonewton, meaning 1,500 newtons. Press Okay. Now all of the boundary conditions are assigned. Next, we need to generate the mesh. So for that we know we need to select the body and we can generate mesh using Net chen mesh generator or GMsh mesh generator. In the previous lecture, we created the mesh using Netten sorry, and in this one, we are going to be carrying out using G mesh. Okay. So the overall results of both of these measures are basically similar. The menos over here in the settings are somewhat different. For example, I will cancel it, click Select the body and create a mesh using Net chen. This Net chin mesh generator is asking us for the maximum size of the elements, the minimum size, whether the elements are going to be second order or the first order, Finness and some other criteria. Then it also shows the number of nodes, triangles, and tetrahns it created in the mesh. However, if we select on click the GMsh button, create a mesh using GMsh, it also has the element dimension. So it is asking us whether we want to create two D elements, three D elements or directly from the share. So if you select the shape to be two dimensional, like if you had selected this phase, then the elements would have been two D if we had selected this from shape option. So currently, the selected geometry is three dimensional, so this shape and this three D option basically means the same thing. Okay? So we can select the shape or the dimensions of the elements. We can also select the order, first order or the second order, the interface is a little bit different as compared to net gen mesh generator. And over here, once again, we have maximum element size and minimum element size. And we can even leave them as they are. So this basically means zero. If we insert zero over here and zero over here, this means a so free cat is automatically going to evaluate the maximum and minimum size of the mesh, where the maximum and minimum size of the elements wherever it is needed. So if you click apply, it is going to generate a mesh, and here we have mesh. Okay. And if you want to know the number of elements and nodes, you get a dialogue box where you can directly see how many elements and nodes or in your mesh like we have in the Net chen mesh. Instead, you will have to look somewhere in this dialog box, and it is over here, here. So we have 309 nodes and 300 elements. Okay. So this is the automatically created mesh. Now we know the length is 500 millimeter, and this is 30 millimeter, and this is ten millimeter, the height is 10 millimeters. Meaning overall the dimensions of our Beam are in millimeters, up to 500 millimeter. So let's say you want to make each element with the max size of 1 millimeter. There will be a lot of elements. Okay. So if you let's say write a very small number over here like something in nanometers, there are going to be the mesher is going to create a mesh generate a mesh where the number of elements would be in millions. Okay? And that is not recommended unless you need that much accuracy. You need to carry out the analysis in that much mesh density. Okay. However, right now, we only have 300 elements, and this is very, very low. So instead of Auto, I'm going to limit the maximum size of the elements to be, let's say, two millimeter. Okay, so I will type two, then click Apply. It will generate a mesh once again, and it is going to take a while to do it. Okay? So now it has been completed, and as you can see, it is a very, very dense mesh. And we have 122,832 elements. So that is weird denser than we need it to be. Okay, so I will make it a little bit coarser. Let's say five. So you will have to do a trial and error over here. I can just carry out the analysis using this, but it is going to be very time consuming and I may not or this kind of dense mesh is basically not necessary, in my opinion for this analysis. It is not needed. Okay. So just carrying out an analysis with a very dense mesh just because you can doesn't really make sense. Okay. So I will make them five, click Apply, generate a mesh once again. And this seems pretty much reasonable to me. Okay? And we have 11,515 elements and somewhere 13,630 nodes. Okay. So let's press. Okay. And we have second order elements meaning we have nodes inside in the middle of these elements as well. Okay. So let's press Okay. And now we are ready to carry out the analysis. But first, we will have to insert the solver. And we will be using calculx solver. So just simply click on this big S over here. Okay. Now let's expand it, and here we have solver CCX tools. Let's double click on that to open them. Okay. So once again, we are going to be carrying out a static structural analysis, so we will keep it this on static, and we will write the input file. So let's click on that. Write completed, press close or sorry, not press close. Run calculus. Okay. So now we are ready to carry out the analysis. So let's do it. Let's see how much time it takes. So I currently have Rison 550600 CPU, and this speed is going to be depending on the time taken by this analysis. Any analysis is going to be depending on your CPU processor. Okay? So I have 12 cores. My processor has 12 cores, son 550600, and here you can see it is using up to 12 CPUs for stress calculations and 12 CPUs for systematic symmetric stiffness and mask contributions. Okay. The more cores you have, the higher clock speed of your processor is, the less time it is going to take to carry out this analysis. Okay? So the analysis is complete. Let's close. And let's first turn on this pipeline CCH results and change the mode view mode from surface to outline. Okay? Press Okay, and let's hide the mesh as well. Okay? So this is the mesh, FEM mesh, G mesh. So let's turn off its visibility. Okay. And we can hide this as well. Okay. Now let's double click on results. It is these results, CCX results. Let's double click on that, and let's see the results for displacement or deflection. The maximum deflection is 70,080.99, once again, we can animate it like this and obviously it is an exaggerated and let's increase it. It is very exaggerated and the analysis is predicting very large deflections. So this is the factor of exaggeration. For example, if I increase it like one, the factor to how much this deflection is exaggerated is by one. Okay? And we can increase it. Okay. So this slider or this animation basically not just in free cat in all finite telemet analysis, analysis, like if you're carrying them out in Ns and these animations basically they are meant to show you the behavior or in which direction the deflections can take place. These are not going to be actual deflection. The beam is not going to deflection. It may or may not, but this does not actually mean that the beam is going to be deflecting exactly like this or to exactly this extent if this beam is exerted, if this beam is subjected to this much load in reality. Okay. And we can examine other results as well. So one miss stress, maximum principle stress, let's see how much is one miss. The maximum is 3,458 megapasle and we can just visualize other results as well. Okay. So let's clause, and let's click on this. I we cannot turn off the visibility of this body. Oh, sorry. The body over here is also the visibility of the initial body is turned on as well. So it is the pad let's turn off that as well. Now we only have the outline for the body, and now if you go to CCX results, let's select this, we can only see the results. The maximum, if we look at displacement, the maximum deflection is over here and minimum deflection is over here. That is expected because this side of the cantiliver beam is fixed and this side is free. So this was all for this lecture. So we generate used a mesh using GMs in this lecture, unlike the previous one, and we carried out an analysis can deliver beam stress analysis as well. So that is all for this lecture. Thank you, and see you in the next lecture. 26. Day 21: FEM - Heatsink Thermal Analysis: I so this is going to be the day 21 or the 21st project of this course, and it is going to be a thermomechanical analysis for this heat sink. This is the same heat sync we created or modeled in the six or six project, and you can just choose that geometry or you can also access the geometry file under the resource section of this lecture. Okay. So the geometry is ready. Let's just head over to the FEM workbench. Okay. So first of all, like always, we will have to create an analysis container. Let's do that, and then we will have to select the material. Okay. And the material we are going to be selecting is going to be copper. And that is because copper is a very good conductor of heat. So let's select copper, and the next step would be assigning boundary condition. Let's expand this analysis, so we have this material applied over here. Okay. So since this is going to be the thermal analysis or thermal mechanical analysis, this means that we can select we can either select only the thermal loads or we can select both thermal and mechanical loads and boundary conditions, or constraints. So we can select these boundary conditions like force loads and fixed boundary condition like we've been carrying out in the previous lecture, or we can use loads. Okay? And the thermal condition that you basically have to assign for every thermal analysis where heat or temperatures are involved is going to be the initial temperature. So this basically means that whenever we carry out engineering simulations, whether in ANCS or any other, we get the engineering simulations in general, we are basically trying to replicate the natural real world. And we are trying to evaluate how this product that we are designing or this part we are designing is going to behave under XYZ loads in the real world. Okay. So in case of thermal analysis, obviously there is going to be the ambient temperature or the environmental temperature of the situation of the room or the place where this heat sink or any other part is going to function. And this initial temperature is that temperature. Okay? The operating room temperature of the region where this heat sink is going to be implemented. So I will select it to be 300 Kelvin. So you will always have to create this constraint, initial temperature, select whatever room temperature you want or initial temperature room temperature, basically the same thing. So I'll just keep it at 300, which basically means something around 27 degrees Celsius. So let's press Okay. Okay. The next load is going to be heat entering this portion over here. And it is going to be inserted using this load, heat flux load, heat per unit surface area. So depending on the type of this heat flux or the type of heat flow, whether it is convective conductive or radiation, we can choose all of these three options. So surface convection would be chosen if it is convective heat transfer. Surface radiation would be chosen if it is radiation based heat transfer and surface heat flux, meaning conductive heat transfer. Okay. So this is going to be conductive, meaning solid to solid heat transfer. So we're assuming that heat is directly entering this bottom surface from the electronic component, it is trying to cool via solid to solid contact. And this heat is basically 250 warts, but here we have to insert it in heat flux, mean per meter square. So this is 33 by 33, I think I don't exactly remember, but I think it is 33 by 33 or 35 by 33. So I've calculated in this value heat if the vatage at total amount of heat in vats entering this surface is 250 vats. So this becomes this heat flux, that same 250 vats per meter square for this surface comes out to be somewhere around 230,000 vats per meter square. Okay. So let's just select that and click over here. So the magnitude is selected, then we have to select the surfaces. So for that, click on this Add button over here and it is only going to be this surface. Okay? Here. Click. Okay. So now we have a surface on the set sink where heat is entering. Okay. Now we need another constraint. We can either select all of these surfaces and assign temperature or heat evaporated into the atmosphere values, or we can just assign temperatures to these top surfaces. So what we're going to do, we are going to create a temperature difference so the heat flow occurs. So we will create a temperature boundary condition, meaning directly entering temperature. Room temperature is once, and the magnitude of that temperature is going to be 300 Kelvin, meaning room temperature. So we are going to assume that heat is going to enter over here. Okay. And these top surfaces of the fins of this heat sink are going to be staying at room temperature. So it is basically an assumption. Okay? And that room temperature, as we already know, is 300 Kelvin. Okay. So magnitude is set. So click on add to add all of the surfaces. You can see that button this Add button over here has a pinkish encircling to it, meaning it is selected. Now we need to simply select on all of the surface. We want this 300 Kelvin temperature condition to be assigned to. So this is going to be this surface, all of these top surfaces. So let's select them one by one. Here we go. So this surface, this one, this one, this one, and like this. Okay, so let's press. Okay. So we have all of the required conditions. Next, we need to create mesh. For that, let's select the body. We can create it using Net chen or GMsh. Let's just move over with G mesh, and first, let's just create a default, mesh choosing autosizing. Click apply let's see what it creates. 7,000 elements. Let's refine it a bit and restrict the maximum size of the elements to be 5,000. Sorry, five millimeter. Okay? So the max size is five, minimum is automatic. So click Apply. Let's see what happens this time. This time we have a relatively finer mesh with 32,000 elements. Okay? So that is perfect, I think. Let's press Okay. Next step is, as you all know, we need to create the solver, calculate solver, double click on that. And since this time we are conducting a thermomechanical analysis because our loads are thermal, so we will have to select this thermomechanical option over here and then write the input file. If you still go with static and try to write the input file, it is going to give us an error. And it says static analysis, no mechanical boundary condition defined. So we have not assigned any mechanical boundary condition like forces loads or fixed surfaces, so that is not going to work. Okay? So let's select thermomechanical, write the input file. It is completed. Let's run the calculus to start the analysis. So let's see how long it takes. Okay, so at second and I think it is completed. Okay, 11 seconds, 11.5 seconds. So let's close, and let's turn off everything. Okay? We don't need these symbols for constraints. Let's turn off the mesh visibility, mesh visibility as well, and let's turn off this shedding as well. So nothing is visible. Okay. So now we will double click on CCX results and let's see the results. First of all, let's look at temperatures. So the maximum temperature in this entire geometry is 329 kelvin that is obviously going to be over here, and the minimum is 300 kelvin, which we restricted on top. So there is basically a very little temperature difference between this entire body. So what we're going to do and you can see that it is entirely red, meaning 300 minimum, 329 maximum, only 29 degree kelvin. Difference. What we're going to do, we're going to purge all of the results and let's turn on the body. And where is the heat flux here. So this is the heat flux inserted at this bottom surface. And what we are going to do, we are going to increase its value. So it is 230,000. Let's make it very, very big. Something like 999,000. Okay. So that there is a much wider temperature difference. Okay? Or what we can do, let's simply delete this heat flux. So let's turn on this temperature constraint. So the top surfaces are restricted to be at 300 kelvin. So what we're going to do, instead of heat flux, we're going to just set another boundary grandation. It is going to be temperature and we are going to be selecting this surface. And magnitude is going to be let's set something very, very high, let's say, 1,000 kelvin. Okay. This surface is 1,000 kelvin, very hot and this surface is the top surface is 300 kelvin. Obviously, there is a temperature difference, so heat will flow from this bottom side to this upper slide. Let's keep the mesh as it is no need to regenerate the mesh. Let's double click on solver, write another input file and run calculus. So the reason I'm doing this again is because there is no clear temperature gradient forming inside this geometry. The maximum temperature and the minimum temperature are very, very close. So the temperature difference throughout this body is not very noticeable. So that is why I changed the temperature over here to 1,000 Kelvin. So press close, let's hide everything. Let's click on CCX results. And this time, we can see a much more noticeable temperature grading it. Okay. So here it is. We can also show, let's animate this. Okay, so obviously this is once again, it is going to be very, very exaggerated. So basically, because of this temperature gradient, the heat is going to be flowing temperature difference because of this temperature difference no temperature gradient, temperature difference, sorry. So because of this temperature difference, high temperature over here and low temperature here at the top surfaces, heat is going to flow from this bottom surface to the top surface. And because of that heat flow, stresses are going to be generated inside this body. Okay. And because of those stresses, the body is also going to it is subject to deflection, but deflections are going to be very, very, very small because due to thermal stresses. Okay. So if you look at displacements, so the maximum deflection possible is 1.28 millimeters, and it is possible over here on these surfaces. Okay, here. And minimum is like in micrometer, so very, very small, and this is very exaggerated deflection view. Okay. So other thing, we can see one miss stress. So these are stresses generated because of the temperature difference or thermal loads. So these are thermal stresses, not mechanical stresses. The maximum is 343.35 megapicles over here on these kind of surfaces. Okay. So we can also see maximum principal stresses, minimum principle, maximum shear or stress ca stresses and other variables. So this was all about how to carry out thermal analysis or thermomechanical analysis, which we've just carried out because it was a thermomechanical because we predicted or we analyzed the stresses generated because of those thermal loads. As well as we also generated a temperature gradient. It is a thermal analysis as well as a mechanical analysis. So overall, a thermomechanical analysis. That was all for this lecture. Thank you. 27. Day 22: FEM - Thermostructural Analysis: So this is going to be the day 22 or 22nd project of this course. And once again, it is going to be a finite element method analysis problem. And this time, we're going to be conducting an analysis with both thermal and mechanical loads. Okay? So it is just going to be a cantilever beam, so I will just create a cantilever beam, okay with part design work pinch, and I will have to create a sketch. So let's select the right plan. Okay. And once again, we will create a rectangle. Okay. So let's create a rectangle. Let's make it 20 or let's make it 30, and its height is going to be ten. Okay. Let's close pad, and its length is going to be 350 millimeters. Okay. So let's make the height length 350, and here we have our cantliver beam. Okay. So but this time, we are going to be having this phase is obviously going to be fixed because it is going to be a cantliver beam. We will have a point load over here and a heat source applied to this bottom surface, okay? And not a heat source, but rather we will have this bottom surface to be kept at a certain temperature. Or let's make this surface over here at a certain temperature, and we will not choose a point load over here, but rather we will try to insert a point load right here at the middle of this surface. Okay. But right now, as you can see, if we go over to let's go to FM work pinch, create an analysis container and go to model. Okay. So first step would be obviously selecting the material. So let's do that. First, let's change it to isometric view. So let's move it over here. Okay. So material, let's select the material, and it would be this one because it is a solid material, so we will click material for solid. So I will make it steel. Let's make it steel, this normal steel, calculate steel. The material has been assigned and we can see it over here under the analysis. The next thing is obviously, as you know, is creating boundary conditions. Obviously, one boundary condition would be over here, fixed surface, then we would have another boundary condition on this surface, which is going to be a temperature, a certain temperature. However, we want to assign force right here in the middle. Here, a point load right here in the middle or let's say if you had to insert a point load at any point on the top surface, how can you do that? Because because directly you cannot do that. For example, if you click on this force load, let's select that. Over here, if you click on Ed, we can select edges or faces. We can select this edge, we can select this edge, this edge, any of these edges or the surface or the top surface. If we apply any load on the top surface, that is going to be uniformly distributed load all over this surface. So directly, there is no way of inserting point load somewhere over here, and we need to fix that. So let's say what we will do, not let's say, what we will do, we will cancel. We will move back to Pisign workbench, and we will create a sketch. So firstly we will have to select this body so that we are not creating any sketch in other body. So let's make this body active, go to task and click on Create sketch. Okay? So we selecting the stop surface. Let's select that and click Okay. So it's not working, okay. So basically, we will have to select this surface, not entire body. So we had the entire body selected. So just select this surface. Tasks, create sketch. Now we can create sketch on this surface. Let's rotate first. Okay. So what we will do, we will first create reference lines by using external geometry. So we will extract one of these ength the long line, horizontal line, and one either this one or this one, vertical line. Okay. And what we now are going to do, let's insert this one as well. Okay, so we are one, two, three reference lines. Okay. So Oops, I clicked on Close. So let's go click on this model and it is this sketch, sketch zero, zero, one. So double click on that to open it. Okay. So we have the reference sketches right now. We will love to rotate it once again. So what I'm going to do, I will simply draw a line, and I will write. Let's draw it somewhere. If you want to draw it right in the middle, you can just directly move around and your cursor will snap to the center of this reference lines that we have just created. Okay. At anywhere else, you have to manually eyeball and just insert. So let's insert it somewhere over t over here. Let's put it over here. Okay? Close to this fixed support end. Okay. So let's create a line. So up to this point, so it's width. We already know, but let's just make it up to this point. Okay. Press the tab key first chance, the angle angle would be zero degrees. So zero enter. It would be a vertical line. Now, it should be -90, but these angles are in reference to the surface. This is a top surface, and from that surface, this is horizontal axis, and its length would be up to this line that we have just extracted. Let's move around and once it snaps to that point at 30 millimeter release. Okay, press close. And here we just have a line on this surface. Now let's move back to FM workbench. And now let's click on force load. Click on Ed and now we can select this edge as well. Now we can insert loads on this edge. If you have a surface and on that surface, if you want to assign point loads on top of the surface, it is not technically a point load, but rather edge load. But still, if you are looking at the front view in a two dimensional manner, it is still a point load. So if you had not created this edge, this line over here, this sketch, any load applied on the surface would be universally uniformly distributed all over that selected surface. So if you want to specify loads on a certain surface, you will have to manually create a sketch. You don't need to use any pad features, create the sketch and use the lines or circles or any other shape on the sketch to assign point loads. Okay. So the magnitude for this one is going to be 3,000 Newton, meaning three kilo Newton and direction needs to be in the downward direction. Currently, as you can see, it is in the upward direction, so we will select this reverse direction to make it go downward. So why it is not changing direction, let's see. Let's change its direction by using an edge. Okay. So let's select this edge and click on direction. Now let's see that direction. It is still in the upward. So let's click on reverse. Now it is in the downward direction. Okay? So now it is in the downward direction, we specified this direction by choosing this edge. We have done this in the previous lecture as well. So let's press Okay. And now we have a point load of three kilonewton over here. Apart from that, we are going to add another load, and it is going to be uniformly distributed over the surface. So we'll simply select the surface, click Add or click Add, and then click surface. Sorry. Okay. Let's reverse the direction, and this is going to be 1 kilonewton, meaning 1,000 Newton. Okay. Also, there is going to be temperature. This edge of this Cliver beam, the edge which can be deflected. No, sorry, not this one, but rather this edge. Okay. So this edge, the fixed edge or the fixed end of this beam is going to be kept at a very high temperature. Okay. So we will once again select temperature condition over here, select click on this Add button and select this surface. Okay. And this temperature is going to be 2000 Kelvin, very, very high temperature. Okay. So 2000 would be very, very high. I think the steel would basically melt. So I would change it to let's say something like 800. Okay. So because if you select temperatures which are above the melting point of a material, then the finite element analysis is basically going to provide you an error. It will not show you the results. O. So the temperature is assigned, everything is set. The only two things we need to do more is one, we need to select a fixed support. So there needs to be a fixed support or any other constraint, if there is a mechanical load, and there are two mechanical loads, force over here and force all over this surface. And this constraint is also we are going to be applying to this surface. So just select this surface. Click Ed, select the surface and okay. So now the surface is fixed, as well as it is subject to a very high temperature. Okay. And also, what we're going to do, we are going to set room temperature, click Okay, and let's keep it at 300 Kelvin or which is approximately equal to 27 degrees Celsius. Okay. So everything is set. All of the boundary conditions are assigned. Now let's move over to we need to assign the temperature over here as well, because there needs to be temperature difference in order to have a certain flow of heat. Okay? So this is at 100 Newton at 100 Kelvin soy that surface the fixed end of this stilver beam. So this free end is going to be at room temperature. Okay? So just once again, we will create this temperature load, temperature boundary condition. Can add, select this surface, and it is going to be 300 Kelvin suppress. Okay. So there is 800 calvin over here, 300 kelvin over here. There is a temperature difference, so heat will flow from this end to this end, from the fixed end to free end, and on top of that, there is this mechanical load as well. Okay. So everything is set, all the boundary conditions are assigned. Now let's move on to generate the mesh. Select the body and create a mesh. Which one should we choose? Let's choose the G mesh. Okay. So from shape, meaning three dimensional and second order, let's make them second order. Let's first generate a mesh using default automatic settings, automatic sizing, click apply, and here is the mesh. Okay, so let's make it a bit finer. Make the maximum size to ten. And currently, we only have like 305 elements. We can see over here. Okay. So with the size ten, click Apply. Now we have 2036 elements. Okay. So let's create a mesh. Okay. And for the time right now, let's hide all of these constraints. Okay, these notations or indications of those constraints. So now mesh is generated, and we are ready to move on to carrying out the analysis. So let's click on this solver. Create a solar object over here. Let's double click on that. It is going to be thermomechanical. So let's select that and write the input file. And the input file is written, but we have some errors, error in Get ref agin ore. So it is kind of giving us some errors in the mesh. Okay. Let's see what happens. Let's run the calculation, the analysis, and it is everything is calculated. It only took 0.9 seconds. There may have been some error according to free cad in the mesh, but it is not crucial enough to have a relation. Basically, we can still carry out the analysis. Free card but still able to carry out the analysis. And for this one, let's hide the body and hide this as well. Let's click on that, change it to surface to outline, click Okay, let's hide the mesh as well, and everything is ta. Okay. So let's now click on CCX results, and here we have the results. So currently it is set to none. If we look at displacement, so we have high displacement over here that is expected because it is a can't deliver beam, and the maximum possible deflection is 10.17 millimeter. We have the one misi stresses, and the mag stress is generated over here because the surface is fixed and it is moving in the downward direction. So majority of the stresses are going to be generated at the fixed end. Okay? We can also see the temperature curve or the temperature gradient. So high temperatures over here, low temperatures over here. Okay. And we can see all other values as well, maximum principle, maximum. And minimum principal stresses and different types of displacements. So obviously, so we can close it, and let's show the mesh again. So obviously, the accuracy of the results will increase if the mesh density is higher. So let's just try it one more time. Okay? So perche all the results by clicking this button. Okay. Then click on this mesh. And let's make it 5,000,050, so five millimeter. Okay. So 50 would make the mesh coarser instead of making it finer and tenser. So let's try that. Let's generate a mesh, and this time, we have 8,136 elements. Let's make it even more fine. Let's make this to 2.5. Okay. Let's double the element size. So click Apply and this time, it is a very dense mesh. Okay. And we have 47,154 elements. Let's try that one. Okay. So obviously, it is going to take a much longer time, but let's see, write the input file even that is taking longer, once again, we get this error, but we can just ignore them because it is not interfering with our analysis. So run calculx and this time it will take comparatively more time. Okay. Okay, let's just close it. I just so let's purge, there are no results. So this time, what we are going to do, let's show all of these forces and constraints. So we have a point load over here and uniformly distributed load on this entire surface. So what we are going to do, we are going to delete this uniformly distributed load. So this is this 14001, left click to select it and delete it. And what we are going to do, this is the constraint force, it is this point load over here, and we are going to make it a bit higher. So let's make it 8,000 or Newtons or eight kilo Newtons. Let's hide everything once again because there is no need to see all of these symbols, keep the mesh as it is, double click on solver, write the input file, and once again, we get the error and run calculus. Let's see how long it takes 6 seconds. I'll just skip forward to the moment it is completed. So it took 34 seconds. So let's close, and we don't need to see anything. So we'll just click on this solve CCX results, double click on that. And here we have all of the variables. So displacement obviously is going to be over here, and it is much smaller displacement, maximum deflection possible. And it is either due to it is much more accurate result, but this reduction is due to the removal of this uniformly distributed load. Okay. We also have the temperatures and we have the one miss stress. Okay. So once again, the stresses are generated over here. Okay. So if you look at the deflection, let's change it to isometric view. Let's animate the deflection, like this. And as you can see, if you look at from this, side, this view, it is not directly going downward on this edge. And that is because the force applied is over here and not over here. So in the previous lecture, lecture before that when we did the previous Cantilever beam, the beam was going directly downward. Okay? That was because there was only force applied being over here. Now we have force somewhere over here as well as we have temperature here as well. So temperature is causing thermal expansion, which is visible extremely it is an extremely exaggerated depiction, but still it is showing thermal expansion as well as deflection from this portion, from this end. So this was all about this lecture, and in the next video, we will do we will move on to creating engineering drawings. Okay, so thank you. 28. Day 23: TechDraw - Part Drawing: This is going to be the 23rd project of this course and in this lecture, we are going to be starting creating drawings. This is the pipe we created while working on part models and we are going to be using it for the creation of drawings. If you have already modeled it and saved it, you can use that model, or you can use any other model if you like, whatever model, or you can use this model which will be provided to you under the resource sections of this lecture. Okay. So once you've created the model of the part you want to create drawings of, first of all, what you need to do, you need to go over here, click on this part design Wpench dropdown menu, and move over to Tectra. TecraO the technical drawings is the workbench used for creating engineering drawings in free cad. Okay? So now, as you can see over here, we are in tetra workbench and we have all of the tools available here which are associated or which are contextual to that workbench. First of all, to create a drawing, we require a page because every drawing needs to be on a page, so we will create a page. For that, we need to go over here and we have these two options. One is, as you can see, let's see. Okay. So here we have this option, the very first option, this one. And if you click on that, it says insert default page. So it is going to insert a default page, which you can see over here. Okay. So this is most of the time going to be a blank page, meaning no lines, no title block, nothing. Okay. And over here, as you can see, it says, page. Now, this model, this CAD model and this page, both of these things are stored inside the same free cad document file dotfcTD. Okay? Here. Okay. So all of these files which we have created while working on this course, they store everything. For example, right now, we're using this file pipe dot FC STD. This file contains this CAD model as well as this page. Okay. And if we carry out some analysis in FEM page, that would also be stored inside the same free cad document. So everything is stored in the same document. Now, this was blank page, which we created by using this button. Now, if you close it and over here, as you can see, it's marked as page, just a page. Okay. So if you close it, and instead we click on this option, it says insert page, but not a default page, rather it is going to insert patge using a template. And 99.99% of the times you are going to be doing there. So let's just do it. Click on that. And now the free cad will directly navigate to the directory where all of the templates are stored, and they are stored in the form of SVG documents or vector files. Okay. So we have a 00 documents, then we have A one, A two, A three, a four, then we have the NC standard and architectural drawing pages and other US letter page as well. So you have many different templates. We are going to be using these templates. Okay. So we can select any one of these standard pages. So we have a zero. And for each standard for a zero, you have one blank page, you have an advanced and one minimal. So these advanced and minimal they dictate how much information or how much basically information and outlines, et cetera, are going to be on that pad. So for example, if we select, let's say, a three landscape blank, these pages are going to be blank, a landscape apart from A four. A four is available in landscape as well as portrait mode. Okay. So for example, if I select A three Landscape blank, let's open it. Now, this page will have the dimensions of a standard a three page, but it is going to be blank. Over here, as you can see, this new page that we have created just now is marked as page 001. It is the second page in this document. The first one is over here, which was that initial blank page we created. We can close it and we can still see both of these pages available over here. We have not used any one of them, so I will just select it and delete it, select this other page, delete it as well. Let's insert another page using template. This time, I will insert a three landscape minimal, okay? So most of the time, I like to work in a three pages because it is the most optimum size of page, in my opinion. So you can pick whatever you want. So let's select a three landscape with minimal outlines and details. So let's open that. And here we have the three minimal outlined page. So we have this title block over here, some information, and this page, we have the markings over here as well. So we're going to be working on this patch. So obviously, on a page on a drying page, we are going to insert different views of the part. So over here, we have the part. To create view, the first view is going to be this one, insert view. You have other options as well. You have broken view, you have active view and other option which becomes available once we have some views of our part created over here. So first of all, obviously, we are going to be creating this part, the drawings of this part. So what I will do go to page, go over here, select this body. Okay, now the body is selected, move over to patch again and click on this button. It says, insert view. Left click to select it. And now, as you can see over here, we have the view the front view of that part. Okay? Because if we go over to this card model, move over to the front view and this is the view, which has been inserted over here. Okay. And here we have some settings for that as well. The first setting is going to be which you need to make sure or to concentrate on is going to be this scale. So currently it is page, and by page is most of the time going to be dependent. It is going to be one to one ratio. Meaning, if this size is, let's say, for example, I don't exactly remember, let's measure it over here, or let's just move it over here. So if in the real part over here, the distance between this portion and this portion is, let's say, 50 millimeter. Then on the page, the distance between this line and this line is going to be 50 millimeters as well, meaning the transition from the actual part or to the drying is going to be one to one ratio in terms of its dimensions. Okay, so if your part is smaller than the size of this sheet, you won't face any problems. Okay. The part can be a bit big and it could be difficult to place other views over here, but most of the time it will not be an issue. However, let's say you are designing something like a huge cran, et cetera. Okay. Huge cantlever beam used in construction, et cetera, that is going to be very, very long. Obviously, it is going to be much larger than the size of a piece of pepper, whichever templates you pick. So for that, you will have to use other scales. Okay? To change the scale, you simply need to click over here and you can also select automatic, which is something free cat automatically determines what scale is best for this drawing, for this part. However, in my experience, this doesn't usually work the right in the correct manner. So instead, what you need to do is you need to go to custom. Once you do that, these options become available to you. So currently it is one to one. If I change it to 122, the model becomes smaller. This means that the model, the actual part is two times larger than what it appears to be on this page. So if you measure this distance to this point over here, this distance from this line to this line on this piece of pepper, the actual dimension is going to be twice of that dimension. So it is one to two ratio. You can increase it again, and you can also go below zero. For example, if you type 0.5, Okay. So you cannot do that. For that, you will have let's say you are creating something very, very small and you want it to appear large on the piece of paper, then you would increase this number. Okay? So two to one, meaning the part is half the size afforded actually appears to be over here. So obviously, for this one, I think the most appropriate one to one fits on the page as well, but if you go one to two, in that way, we can put some more views over here on this piece of pepper as well. I will use one to two ratio, meaning the actual part is two times larger than what it appears to be on this piece of pepper. Okay? Then you can change what view it is going to be the central view. By default, it is going to be the front view. However, you can still change that. If you select this button, it will be rotated to the right. So now we have the right view, then you have the left view. You can rotate to the top as well, rotate up, rot it down, rotate clockwise, rotate antiquar clockwise or counterclockwise. Then you can directly move over to isometric or camera, whatever the camera is facing over here. So for example, if I change the camera to like this and let's say you want this view over there, go over to this this portion where this model is viewing is in the view instead of the page, okay? So set up your view, go to the page and click on this camera button. Okay. And it will just transfer the current active view in the view port over here to this piece of pepper or drying. Okay. And if you just want to go back to the front view, you can simply click on this button. Okay? And by default, I like to put the front view over here. Now, along with this view over here, here, here, and in all its directions, you can set projection views as well. So for example, this is front view. Over here, we would like to put the view, the view from the right side of this part. For that, we will have to check this box. Okay. So over here we have the left view. If you check this box, we will have the right view. Okay. So currently, as you can see, over here, once you turn on these projection views, once you turn on these projection views, these options become available. Okay. So let's go over projection a bit later. Underneath that we have this auto distribute. If you turn it off, then you can set whatever distance you like. And if you turn the auto distribution on, then you can set the distance. For example, let's say we set ten. Okay, click Apply. Now, the distance between these two views, it is ten millimeter along X axis. Okay? So let's put a top view over here as well. Let's put a view over here. Okay. So using this button, you can set you can select or adjust the distance between each views along X axis. And using this option, spacing, you can select the vertical spacing between views. So if you turn that to ten, once again, type ten, click on Applei. This view becomes much closer to this view. Okay. So I will just return it to 15 because that is the optimum distances. Okay. You can change it to whatever you like. Okay? And if you turn it off, then what you can do, you can simply go over here and just select these views, and you will have to select them by selecting the small greenish outline around it. Okay, or you can just click on this text over here as well. Just left click to select. And while keeping the left mouse button pressed, you can move it around and put it wherever you want. Okay? And so you can put it up like this as well. Okay. So now let's move over to this option, projection. And currently, it says first projection. Okay? So in engineering drawing, technical drawings, you have two different kind of projections. And these projections basically determine according to what perspective these left and right directions, top to bottom directions are judged or decided. First currently it is on first angle. So first angle projection basically means that these views, this left view, right view, bottom view, all of these views are going to be named from the perspective of the pepper. Okay? So this view over here, it is the right view because it is to the right side of the front view on this sheet of pepper. Similarly, this is the left view because this is to the left side of this front view on this piece of pepper. Okay? Similarly, if we change first angle to third angle and click Apply, Okay, click Apply. Why it is not working, let's turn off these views. Okay, click Apply and select it once again. So set it to Auto distribute, create a view over here, click Apply. Why is it not changing? It should change. I think it is some kind of a bug. Let's change it to page, click Apply. I think changes again as well. Okay. So let's put third angle. Okay, now it has changed. Okay, so left. So this is nuisance which we often face in free cat like you have to delete and then insert a lot of things to make sure that the free cad updates or parameters. So right now, this view is the right view. Previously, this was the left view. Okay? Over here, the label over here was left, and this was the right view. Now it has changed. It has changed because now we have moved over to the third angle projection. Okay. And if you put another view over here, previously over here, we had the bottom view, but this time it is the top view. And if you put another view over here, the bottom view is on this bottom side. Now, these projections are from the perspective of the viewer. This view right now is called right view because it is to the right side of this front view according to the viewer. Same thing with the left view, the top view because it is at the top, and then it is at the bottom. Okay. Similarly, you can put other views like this angled views over here as well, front top, right, left to right, as well. Okay? You can put a lot of views, even the rear view. But the rear view and the front view are same, so they're not needed. So ideally, when you're creating a drawing, you should not have more than not more than you should only have as much views as needed. Okay? For example, right now, the left view and the top view are left view and the right view are practically identical. So we don't need both of them. Okay? So what I'm going to do, I'm going to remove this left view. Okay? Then let's move it over here. Then if we move this one, the central view, which is the front view, everything moves, and we can move it along Y direction and X direction as well, horizontally and vertically. But these views, this is the right view since it is a projection view, not the central view. We can only move it in X axis. Similarly, we can only move these views in wide direction. Okay. So let's place them over here. Let's move this one up a bit, let's move this one over here and move all of them to this side of the pepper like this. Okay. So once you have set up all of your central views and the projection views, simply press Okay, and there we have our views. Okay? Now over here, it says front, bottom, right, top. Now this is correct because it is the top view, this is the front view, right and bottom. But let's say you want to change this label over here, you can select individual view, left click, move over here, and here it says label. You can write whatever you want over here and would also update its notation over there as. Okay. So I will just move it, change it back to bottom. Okay. So now we have these three views. You can still move them around. Now as Okay. Now let's put another view. Let's put this image like this shaded image on this drawing somewhere over here in this isometric manner. So first of all, let's change our view in this viewport to isometric view, isometric. Now we have this view in the viewport, and what we are going to do, we are going to just insert this active view in the viewport over to this document somewhere over here. For that, you will have to go over here and click on this camera button. It says inside active view. Left click. And you can change its position like you can change whether it should have background or not. If it has background, then what kind of colors you can select over here as well. But I'm just going to keep it as no background, and I'll just keep its dimensions as they are. Okay? Let's press Okay, and over here we have the active view. Okay? So let's put it somewhere over here. Okay. And for this one, over here under this design tree, if we select this active view and go to these options, we can change this label as well. So instead of it's saying active view, let's just remove this label altogether. Okay, we don't need this label over here. Okay. And once again, I will select this active view, and over here we have the option of scale. So it is 121 right now, I will change it to 122, and it enlarges, so let's make it 0.5. Okay. Now it is smaller. I think 121 would be better. One like this. Okay? So this is how you can insert active views into the ranks. Next, we have the section views. Okay? The section views are the views which are somewhere inside if you want to see inside of a certain part. Okay. Let's say if we want to, we have this front view and we create a section line right through the middle in the vertical direction. Okay? So there is going to be a plan inserted over here. So obviously, we are seeing it from the front view. Let's move it over here. We are seeing it like this. Over here in this front view, but it is actually a three dimensional product. Okay? No product, three dimensional part. Okay? So let's say if we create a plane, okay, a section line or section plan, right cutting it through right through the middle, okay? And then if you look at it from this left side or the right side, what view would it be? Okay. So since that view would be inside of this part. That is why it is called section view. Okay? So for section views, you will have to first select a certain view where you want to insert that section line. Okay. So we'll select this front view. Now while it is selected, click on this option. Okay? It says, insert a simple or complex section view. So let's click on that, and then we have these options. Okay. Rotate it, rotate. Okay. So let's see where it is inserted. Click on this button update now, and as you can see it is inserted this section view over here, and here we can see a dotted line as well. Okay. Now, which view it is going to be, you can control it by using this clock over here. So it is basically an orientation or the map of this section line or the section then, but you can think of it as a clock. So currently, the clock is going like this. Okay? And meaning it is cutting the part through the middle. Okay? This is the section line, meaning it is going to be cutting this part somewhere over here, and we are seeing the inside of this part from this side. Okay. And that can be seen by this arrow. So the cutting line is over here, and we are seeing it from this left side. Sorry. We are looking at it from this side. Okay. So this side. Okay. And everything we are standing over here, we are looking at it from this side and everything between the viewer suppliers yourself where the pointer is right now and everything between the viewer and this section line, which is actually a section plan. But because it looks like a line because we are looking at it from its direct to bidimensional front view. Okay? So this line is actually a plan facing this direction. Okay, left side of the monitor and the right side of the patch. So the left side from the perspective of the viewer and the right side of the monitor of your screen. Okay? So you are standing somewhere over here and you are looking at this section view. And this portion, everything between this section plan or the section line is removed. So you are seeing this portion from here to here and here. Okay? So over here, there is a hole. This hole is visible over here. And then this part beneath that is basically this portion from this point to this section line, and then this portion over here is actually from this line to this line. Okay. So this is how you can create directly insert section views. Now you can change a lot of things about the section views as well. So first of all, over here we have the scale. So by default, it is going to be the same scale of this view over here. So this was one, two, two, meaning the part is two times larger in actuality of what it appears to be on the page. Same scale is transferred over to this section view as well. But if you want to make the section view larger, you can do that, change it scale over here as well. So for example, if I put two, sorry, one and update. Now, this is one to two ratio, but this is actually one to one ratio. Okay? So the section view does not have to be necessarily the SAM scale of of the scale, the section view does not have to have the same scale as of the view from which that section view is created. Okay. So right now, this section view is created from this front view, so front view has scale of one to two, but this section view has one to one, so they don't necessarily need to have the same scale, but it is a good recommendation to keep them at the same scale. So I will just keep it 0.5, meaning making this view half of it actually is. Okay, so 0.5, update, and now both of these are of the same size. So I'll just put it over here. Now let's move on to this section line. Currently, it is over here. Using these buttons, one, two, three, four, these arrows and this arrow and this arrow over here, you can also rot at this section line of section plan as well. If you use these buttons, these buttons will rotate this section line, which is currently going vertical over here by 90 degrees. For example, it is going currently over here and if you select this button, it says, pleas set view direction viewing up Okay. So what is it is going to do if you left click on that? Now, it is going to insert the section view horizontally, and it will place the viewer somewhere over here, meaning the section view is over here, the section line is over here, and we are basically looking at that portion cut portion from the bottom. Viewer is viewing that model in upward direction. Okay? As it says, reset view direction looking up. So the viewer is looking up. Now if we update, now the section line, let's move it over here. Now the section line is horizontal over here. Okay. So this one is going to be the same thing, but the viewer will be placed at the top. Okay? The section line would stay the same, but previously the viewer was over here looking in upward direction. Now the viewers viewer would be at the top, looking at looking at this part downward. Okay? And if you update now, now we have a different view. You can select this option. Okay, line directly going through the middle. Update, but the viewer is placed over here to the right. And then over here, the viewer is placed to the left, which was its initial position. Okay. Similarly, let's say you are happy with this view, the viewer is over here looking from this left side, but you want to rotate this section view. Okay? So you can do that by choosing these arrows. Okay. So this is going to rotate this section line in clockwise, and this is going to rotate it in anticlockwise direction. So if you rotate clockwise, it is going to rotate it by ten degrees. So right now, as you can see, it is going to be something like this, meaning negative 40 degrees. Okay. So up that now. Now as you can see, the section view is at an angle, and that angle is negative 40. And the viewer is placed on this side. So these arrows over here represent from which direction the viewer is looking at. Okay? So the viewer is over here, he's looking at in this direction, okay, from this to this direction. The direction the cursor is moving right now this direction and from that viewpoint, this section view is created. Or you can just sell directly insert angle over here. Let's say if you type 45 plus 45, and upt now it is in positive 45 degree angle. And it's 45 is calculated from this vertical line. So if you have a vertical line like this, the angle from this point to that point would be 45 degrees. Okay. So moreover, you can change this section size of the section as well. Okay? So let's make it smaller, larger, update. Okay. Now it is showing us less. For example, if you make it, let's say, 30 and in that direction 30 as well, update. Now it has directly put it over here. Okay? So you can change the control, the location of this section plan by using these coordinates as well. Okay. So what I'm going to do, I'm just going to click Cancel because we have messed so many things over here. Click on this front view again, click on this section view again, and let's select this direction the This one, sorry. Okay? The viewer is over here and is looking at from this side. Okay? Update, and we have a section view over here. Okay. Let's place it somewhere over here and press. Okay. So this is how you can create section views. And once again, we have this section so you can select this and change this label to whatever you like. Let's call it section one. And over here we have section one. Okay. Let's move this top view to the top and this bottom view somewhere over here as well. Okay, so the section view has been created. Let's create a detailed view. Detail view is a view extracted from another view, but showing a portion of that view in a much more detail. So for example, right now, we have this hole, okay? So if you want to create a view only of this hole, of this portion, somewhere over here, but much larger. Okay? For that, you would chooe detail view. And for detail view, you simply left click to select a view, once again, just like the section view, move over here, and here we have the option of insert detail view. Left click, and now we have the parameters for that detail view. So directly, it is inserted a detailed view at the center. So whenever you create a new view whether it is a detailed view or a section view or any other kind of view, by default, free cat is going to put that right here at the center of the drawing sheet. Okay? So I will just move it over here. Let's move it over here. Okay. And now let's move it over here so that we can see it better, and then we will move it to its proper location. Let's zoom in a bit and here. So we have the detailed view over here, on top of that, not but on top of that, we have this circle, this dotted circle over here as well. So basically, this dotted circle represents what portion of this bottom view is going to be shown over here in the detail view. Okay. And if you want to change it, what you will have to do, you will have to click on this button, which says drag highlight, left click. Now that circle has become green and it says drag. So simply left click to select it. And while holding the left click, you can move it wherever you want. Let's put it somewhere over here. Okay? We want to show this entire circle, this circle and both of these circles on this detail. Okay. But right now, as you can see over here, this is not showing everything. Okay? For that, you can use these options. So first two options are X and Y axis. So these X and Y axis basically represent the location of your highlighter. Okay? So click on tag highlight if you move it around. You can see the X and Y values change. So these are the coordinates of this highlighter. Okay? This circle which controls what portion of this view is going to be shown over here is called a highlighter. So let's move it over here. So we're just going to assign its location by just selecting it and dragging it instead of instead of entering X and Y coordinates over here because that is much more easier. To make this circle larger, you need to increase its diameter. By default, it's ten millimeter. Let's increase it, and now when we increase it, as you can see, more and more, the circle is getting larger and more more options. Bigger portion is shown over here. Okay? So let's make it 14, 15, 20. Okay? Now, we can see both circles over here and a little bit of portion of the pipe as well, instead of that, along with the app opening. So this is the smaller circle, the inner radius inner diameter. This is the outer diameter, and this portion over here is a little bit of portion over here of this pipe. Okay. So that is perfect. Now, what we're going to do, we are going to change its scale. We want to show this portion, which we have over here in one to two ratio scale, and we're going to show it over here in a much more larger scale. Much more enlarged image. So you can change to do that, you need to change this scale factor. So currently it is one. If you make it two, no it is this detail view has en last. But the view actual view inside it is still of that same size. For that, you simply have to update any one of these options. So once again, let's change it to page and custom. You simply have to play around with these options, so there is no direct update button over here in the section view, simply just change these settings and it will update its view. Okay. Right now, as you can see, it is showing us this portion over here inside this dotted circle in much more detail over here. So if there is a portion you want to focus on and show a bit more detail of that portion, you can do it by creating detailed views. Okay? So let's put it somewhere over here and press. Okay. Now if we zoom in, next to this dotted line, this highlighter for this detail view, which we have just created, there is one written over here. So this means that this portion is shown in detail view number one. So now, what we need to do, we simply need to select it, go to its label over here. It is detail, so let's make it detail one. So that if someone looks at this portion, he is going to know that this is the detailed view of this portion over here. Now we have the detail view. Okay? So let's put it somewhere over here. Okay? So now we have all of the views needed. Let's move this downward a bit. Let's move it upward a bit. Okay. Let's start inserting dimensions. Okay? To insert dimensions, inserting dimensions on engineering ranks is basically same as inserting dimensions while creating parts. Okay? So we have the same dimension tool over here. Let's click on that to insert dimension. Let's say we want to show the length from this line. Okay. Let's click on that, put it over here, and it is 100 millimeters. Okay? Let's see. Let's say we want to show the distance between this point and this point. Let's left click on this point, then left click on this point. And here we have the distance between those two points. So it is 95 millimeters. Okay. So what else we should insert? Okay, let's insert this distance. Okay. It is 25 millimeter. So this portion over here and this portion is same, so I don't think we need to put in the same dimension over here as well. Okay. Let's select the dimension tool. We can select. What else should we select. Let's select this. Okay. And for this one, we can see this total length. This is the same thing. Okay, so okay let's select this dimension tool and rather close, deselect everything. Select this one and let's select this distance. Okay? So it is 60 from this point to this point and let's select this as well to show the radius of this arc over here as well. Let's put it like this. Okay. So while creating engineering drawings, you should not have the dimension for the same portion twice. Okay? So basically, it is a recommendation to leave as only the number of dimensions which are necessary. For example, we have this side over here, label dimension over here and it says 100 millimeter. We don't need to put that dimension over here or over here or anywhere else, because it is the same thing and we don't need to insert the same dimension more than once. Okay? So let's move to this point. Okay, this detail view and insert the radius diameters of both of these circles, which is going to show us the thickness of this pipe. Okay? So we can either select this one and select this one and insert the thickness like this. Okay. So it depends on whatever which route you want to go. We can either select denote this thickness or what we can do, we can deselect everything. Left click to deselect, click on this dimension tool, select this circle. It has 25 degree radius, 25 degrees, 25 millimeter diameter and then we can select this circle, and it is 19 millimeter diameter. Okay. So this is how you can insert dimensions. Another thing you can do is you can insert nations like little text or any other instructions you want to include in the drawing for the manufacturer because obviously you will design the parts, you will create the drawings and you will send those drawings to the manufacturer, and he's going to manufacture that part on the basis of the drawings you provide. For that, you can click on this button, insert a notation. Okay? So left click on that. It is going to insert a default notation over here. Let's move it over here. And you can put any annotation whatever you want to like or let's say we say left click on that, double click, and over here, it says default text. And as you can see here, we have default text written over here as well. So click on that, click on this minus sign to remove it. Now there is nothing written over there. So click on this plus button, move over here, and type whatever text you want to write. So let's say we want to make sure that manufacture with high precision. So high precision is required for this part to manufacture. So write that, like, Okay. And where did it go? Oh, sorry. So we'll have to write over here, manufacture with high precision. So it is basically an instruction to the manufacturer, or you can put any other nodes, et cetera, you want to include as well. So after writing it whatever you want, click on this plus button, click Okay, and here it says manufacture with high precision. Okay? You can just put it over here. And if you want to get rid of this label, select it. And over here, it says, label, just simply delete whatever it says, Okay? Here. So now, it only writes manufactured with high precision. You can just move it down here as well. So everything you create, it needs to be inside this portion. However, these dotted lines that go around this dotted box that goes around this annotation or any other view, it is not going to be a part of our drying once we print it basically in PDF or any other file. So this over here, as you can see, it is going over here below this drying, and that is basically fine because it is not part of the drying. It is just a highlight of this component on this drying, which is an annotation that says manufactured with high precision. Okay. Now let's move over here and change these portions. So over here, we have part material, and it says stainless steel, it is defined. Okay. So to edit it, double click on it and you can write whatever you want. Let's say, what should we like? So what should be the material. Let's just say stainless steel. No need to put the material number, Sandless steel, press Okay. And here it says, stainless steel. So title is pipe. So it basically took the same name from the document which said pipe and it just inserted over here. If you want to write something else, like, let's just type pipe. If you want to insert anything else, you can do it too. Okay? So over here, we have the document type right now, it says assembly drawing, but this is not an assembly drawing. It is a part drawing. Okay, let's move it down. Okay, write like this. Okay. It is a part drank. So what we will do, we will double click on that to change it as well. So all of these blue line text which are underlined with this blue line are editable fields. We can edit them. Okay? So what we will write over here in type, change it to assembly drawing to part drawing. Okay. Then we have the drawing number. Let's just type zero, one. Tops, zero, one. This is drawing number one. Then we have the language over here. We have the data over here. We can edit as well. It is basically going to show you the dat. By default, it will show the dat, which is righ 29. Day 24: TechDraw - Assembly Drawing: So this is going to be the 24th lecture or the 24th project of this course, and here we're going to be creating an assembly drawing. Most of the things are going to be very similar of what we discussed in the previous lecture. So here we have that rack Pinion assembly or rack gear assembly. So I hope you have all of the files for it and if you do not, this geometry will be provided to you along with all the parts under resource section of this lecture. Okay. So here we have the course, let's double click on it to make it active and let's see if it works. It works perfectly. So here it is. Okay. So once again, let's just put it something like this, like this. Change it to a metric view and move over to detect raw workpen because we're going to be creating a drawing. Once again, I will create a page from template, and once again, it will be a three landscape minimal. Let's open it and here it is. Okay. So for this one, what we are going to have, we will have the complete assembly view somewhere over here. Then we will have the views for each of the individual part. Bass over here or somewhere over here, bass, then the rack, and then finally the gear. So first, what we are going to do, we are going to insert the active view, but rather instead of inserting a general view with projections, we will insert the active view of the assembly. So we will select this camera. Okay, click Okay, and here it is. So let's move it somewhere over here. So image this view is going to show it is going to represent how the assembly looks when it is combined together. Okay. Next, over here, we need to create the views for insert all of these three parts. So let's go over here. So we have this body, which is the best, then we have body 001, which is this gear, and then we have body 002, which is the rack. Okay. So we're going to select them one by one and create views. So let's sect this body, which is, as you can see over here in the viewport, it is the best. So now it is selected, move over to the page and click on view. Okay, insert view. So the view is inserted over here. Let's change its scale and make it one, two, two so that it is a bit smaller because we need a lot of parts over here. So let's put it somewhere over here. Okay. Let's insert left view, and I don't think we need any more view. So let's put it somewhere over here. Press Okay. Then we will select body 001, which is this gear. I now it is selected, move back to page and click on this view once again. And here we have the gear. For this one, I think only the front view is enough, and we can just insert the thickness of this or the height of this gear in notation. Let's put it somewhere over here, press, and finally, the rack body 002, move back to page and insert view once again. For this one, we will only we will insert two views. This one over here is like this. This Okay. And for this one, let's change the scale again to one, two, two. Click Okay. Double click on this view again. Or let's go over here and click on Double click. Okay. So this view, it is view 01, as we can see over here and the view 01 is written over here, zero, zero, one, sorry. So double click on that and we forgot to change it scale to one to one 1-1 to 122. So let's change it. Click Apply, click Okay. Okay. So now we have everything. First of all, let's insert some required dimensions. So once again, we will select this dimension tool Zoom in a bit, and insert this dimension, it is 120 millimeters. Let's insert this dimension 120 again. And also, let's insert this radius over here as well. Diameter, 50 millimeter. Next, using this left view, we can show the thickness of this pass. It is ten millimeter or let's move this one. Let's delete this dimension. It is green, meaning it is selected. Press the delete key, it is deleted. Now select the dimension tool once again, and once again, we will select this dimension and we will move this tend to this side. Over here, we will also express the height or the length of this cylinder as, which is 70 millimeter. All of the dimensions for this bass are presented over here. Let's move over to this rack. Firstly, the length, and for this one, I think we will need some detail view. Let's just leave that. Let's move over to this gear. For this one, we will insert the diameter, sorry, the diameter for this hole inside it, and the rest of the information about this gear is going to be presented in a notation. So we will create a notation where it is the notation here. Insert notation, it inserts over here. Let's move it over here. Let's put it right next to this gear. Okay. Double click. So we have this default text selected and click and delete. So first, we're going to put over here of module equal to 3.33. Click on plus, then we will write number of teeth or just N and make it 30. Then click on plus again and press. Okay. Let's put it somewhere over here. Now, using this information, the design, the manufacturer knows that how what should be the diameter of this gear and how big teeth should be and everything. Okay? So this module and number of teeth are enough, and we know that because we basically created this gear in free cat over here by using only these two variables. Okay? Let's select everything, Let's let this thing press the Control key and select other things as well. So if you want to select multiple objects, press the Control key and just left keep on left clicking them to select them. Now, this annotation and this view is selected, let's move it somewhere over here. Okay. For this one, I'm going to be creating a detail view of this teeth. Okay? So create a detailed view. It is over here. First select this front view, create a detail view, detail view, it is inserted over here. So what I'm going to do, I'm going to drag this highlight over here. Then I will make it a bit larger like this, and I will also increase its scale like this. Press Okay, I think that is correct. Now, it was difficult to insert dimensions over here, but we can insert dimensions right now in this detail view. We will put this dimension Okay. Select the dimension tool. Sorry, select the diamond. So first deselect everything. Select the dimension tool by left clicking it, then click on this line. So it is five millimeter, then we can select this thickness over here, 2.8 1 millimeter and this portion over here as well, which is 2.2 millimeter. Okay. Then we can select this angle of the teeth. For that, we will have to select this line and then this line and then insert this angle over here, 110. Degrees. Okay. So let's move it over here and let's change its label. Select this detail view, change its label from just detail to detail one. Okay. So let's move it over. Okay. Now let's focus over here. For this view, this combined assembly view where everything is assembled, what we're going to do, we're going to insert some balloons. Okay? So let's first select this active view, select this balloon and insert it over here. So now we have one. Let's select it again and insert one on this gear and move it over here, select this active view again, click on this balloon, annotation and insert some one over here on this rack and move it over here. So this 123 is basically going to show different parts. Okay? So next to these, we can also put notation like let's write over here, the base and then gear or the rack. But I think it is better to change those names over here. Okay? So left click on that and go this front view of the base. And instead of just label over here, front type bass as well, next to it. Meaning it is going to show that it is the front view of the bass or we can also write front of one, part one, and we know that part one over here is this bass. Then left this gentle level to of this left view from left to left one as well. Now this gear is what is it? It is part number two. So let's change it. Let's type it just gear because there is only one gear, we don't have any more views of this gear as well. Okay. Now let's move over to this rag. It says front zero, zero, one, so let's change it to front. It is P three. Okay? So front of P three, then this is going to be the left of Part three. So you can select whatever drawing conventions you like for your drawings. Okay. So everything is set. Now, let's move over here and change this title block. So material, so there is more than one object over here, so simply just don't write anything, or you can type in detail which part is made up of all materials. So double click on that. Let's say base Next to that you type what should you type? It is made of wood. Okay. Then like this, Bs is word. Oh, let's do it like this. Okay? Best is word, then coma, ga and c is made of steel. Press Okay. Here we have the material. Then you can just like what we did in the previous lecture, you can change its title, you can change its type. So right now it says assembly drawing and it actually is assembly drawing. You can change the scale over here, who created it created by approved by and all of those other parameters as well. Okay. Finally, once again, to export it, just right click export PDF or SVG. Let's export as a PDF again. Let's type C the drying. Let's save it, move over to that folder, navigate to that folder, and here it is that drawing. This is how you can create drawings of assemblies in free care. We have learned how to create drawings for parts as well as how to create drawings for assemblies. So obviously, there is a lot more to creating drawings, but this is 80% required the 20% required to carry out, 80% of the job. So 20 rule, the Perito rule is true in engineering, drawing, computer di design, and other kind of stuff as well, so you don't actually need to know everything like what all of these buttons do. So for example, you have this SVG button over here, it just exports as SIG. This is going to export as DXF. So a lot of these buttons do the same thing do. Manually on these over here, by right clicking. Okay. And you have these other options as well. You can also insert exonometric lens, different type of specific dimensions. But I think it is much more easier to just use the dimension tool. These tools are similar to, while creating models, you can either choose to insert horizontal dimension or vertical dimension or angle. But instead of that, what you can do, you can just simply chooe this smart dimension tool, and it is automatically going to know whether it should put angle over here, length over here, height over here, whatever. It is much more easier to just chooe this tool instead of using the specified dimension tool. However, let's say if you need to specifically need to insert a certain specific type of dimension and the smart dimension tool is actually not working as purpose, according to your purpose, then you can use these drawings as well. Moreover, you have these other options as well. You can change the attributes of these lines. You can extend those lines and other options as well. So you can lock or unlock a view. So for example, we can move this view right now. So if we select it, and click on this button, which says log Unlock view. Now, here is a log sign over here, meaning this view is now lock now we cannot move it, nor we can change its parameter unless we unlock it. To unlock it, let's simply left lip to select it and click on this option to unlock it. Then you have other options as well. Okay then you have customized format label. So if you click on that, you can edit other things as well like labeling, et cetera, as well. So for example, the label right now over here. Let's left click on that. First, let's remove this label or let's go over here. The label says active view. So if you want to change the parameters of this label, so you select it, click on this button, customize format label. It is not working. Let's see for this one. Okay, it is working for this one. Okay. So you can use other GD&T symbols like this. So that is a much more advanced topic geometric design and tolerancing geometric dimensioning and tolerancing is a very advanced topic, and you can basically create all of those drawings over here by using these features. If you want to change the notation of this level. Let's say if I select it, click on this one, and if I want to change this symbol of this notation, this balloon, how it looks, it currently looks like a circle. Let's say if I select this option, Okay. Let's see. Okay. So here we have the format. Okay, let's click. Okay. Now it is showing us that format. Okay. So you can change the format of these labels by using this button. Okay. So I'll just change it to three. We don't need to include any symbols next to it, so let's press. Okay. Okay. So this is essentially all of the knowledge you need to create basic engineering dranks. If you want to go deep into it, you can explore it more and just elevate your engineering drawing game. So that was all for this lecture. Thank you. 30. Day 25: FreeCAD to Blender: Okay, so we are at the end of this course, and this is going to be the final project. And basically, it is going to be a bonus project. What we're going to do, we're going to take the models we have created in free Cad and export them to another software called Blender. You might have heard of it. It is a three d art software where you can create different type models and create textures, renderings. It is used in creation of animated movies and CGI and a whole lot of things. So it is a very complex and very big software. What we are interested in is rendering or creating photo realistic views of our products. So for example, let's say you design a part design, something like an aeroplane, let's say, Okay, and you want to see how will that aeroplane will look like in actuality. Okay? So or when it is manufactured, you can put some colors onto it, you can do a lot, a lot of things and basically create a visual image of how that part is going to look. Okay? So freaked, this blender sorry, it has nothing to do about the accuracy of the drying, et cetera, or the accuracy of the part, accurate dimensions. It has nothing to do with any of that. Okay. It only cares, it is only used. It is only going to be used in our case, for creating visuals. Okay? So first of all, what you need to do, you need to take the export, the models offshore part, you want to create images off. So for example, I will select this heat sink. Okay. I will open this file. You can just open whatever you have created. Okay. And let's here it is. Here it is our heat sink. Click on this file, and here we have this Export option. Okay? So we'll have to select something, so select this body of this heat sync, click on file and Export. Or you can just press Control E. Okay? So I will just put them over here at the desktop. You can export it in a lot of formats. However, to work, in my experience, the format which works best with blender is STL. It is STL file stereo lithography format, and it is essentially used for three D printing, but you can use it for this purpose as well. So heat syn party dot SDL, let's export that, and here it is, where it is. Okay let's move to the stop like this and here here is our body heat sink. Badly. Okay. So let's move to fricat again. Let's close it and click on open a file. And let's see let's move over to this folder where I have stored all of the part files, and apart from heat sink, let's insert the wine glass. Okay? Let's open the wine glass. Here it is file, export. Oops. Once again, you love to select it. So export after selecting wineglass body at SDL. Let's put that over here as well. Let's close it and move over to this geometry. What else should we put? Let's put the spinning top as well. Okay. So spinning top here, it is open select the body, file, export and spinning top body. Okay. So now we have these three geometry files. We have the heat sink, STL file for the heat sink, wine glass, and spinning to. Now we can close free cat and move over to Blender. So the first time you open Blender, it is going to look something like this. Once again, like free cat over here, we have the view pod and some other settings over here as well. Okay. By default, you are going to be your scene. So anything whichever exists in this viewport is called a scene. It is going to contain a cube, a light over here, and a camera. A camera is obviously going to be used to create the image, to take the image. The light is obviously going to light up the scene, and then this cube is basically the object. So for this thing for our case, which we need to take some objects from freekt and put it over here, what I recommend is you delete this cube. To delete it, you simply have to left click to select, press the X key, and then click on this delete button. Or rather you can delete everything as well. Select this camera, Delete, select this light, delete. Okay. Okay. So the navigation in blender is going to be same as what we have been using in fricat because in freaked you might have remembered that we were using the blender navigation button, meaning mouse wheel to zoom in, rotate by using the middle mouse button, pressing the shift key, and then pressing the middle mouse button at the same time, and then moving around to pen. Okay? So navigation is going to be similar if you have been using the blender navigation system like I have. So you can also use other software for creating rendering photorealistic rendered images or as close to photorealistic, that is going to depend on your skill in Blender or any other software in other software as well. You can use Maya. You can use Cinema three D, Cinema four D, sorry, and Keyshat is a very popular. But all of those are going to be pad options. And Blender is free, just like free care. You can just go over to Google, type Blender and download it. You don't have to pay anything and we don't like to pay thing. We don't like to pay money if things are available to us for free. So there is no need to. Okay. So first of all, what we are going to do, we are going to create a plan. That plan is basically going to act as the floor on top of which all of our objects that wineglass heat sink are going to be placed. Okay, to create something, simply press Shift key, and while holding that shift key, press A. Okay? And then click on this. You can create plan, you can create cube, you can create circle and other things. We're not concerned with that. Okay? So let's simply just left click on this plan, and here we have our plan. Okay? And if you look over here, we have this plan in our scene. So this scene collection is going to function like a design tree. Everything you create over here is going to be shown over here. Okay. Now we have the floor or the plan. Let's bring our models. So click on this file button, click on Import. And we are going to be importing dot STL files because that is the format we exported from freekt. So let's left click on that. Move over to Desktop or wherever you have stored, your components, let's select all of them by creating a pox and click Import STL. Now, everything is exported and as you can see, it is very large. Let's first move them and separate them. First of all, left click on this class to select. Press the GK. Now as you can see the symbol has changed. Now you can move it around. Let's press this glass somewhere over here. Then let's click this heat sink, press the GK again and put it somewhere over here. Okay. Or before doing that, as you can see right now, the glass is elevated vertically upward direction. So it is not right here at the bottom, right on that plan that we created. Okay? To fix that, what we will do, we simply press Control Z to go back. Now, the glass is back at its original position and it is touching the ground. Okay. Once again, we will select the glass, press the GK. But instead of moving around, we are going to press the X k. Okay? Now, this red line has become highlighted. So this means now it is only going to be moving along X axis. So now if we move around, we cannot move this in upward direction or in this vertical direction, which is the or along this Y axis, which is the green axis, only along Xxs. Let's put it somewhere over here. If you want to move it along Y, only YXs simply press G, and then press Y. Now we can only move it along YXs. Let's put it over here. Let's select this at sink, press G x again. Let's put it somewhere over here, and let's keep this spinning top where it is. But as you can see, the plan is nowhere to be seen, and that is because that plan is very, very small. It is over here. Okay? So let's select that plan. Zoom out a bit, move out, then press SK. SK is basically scale. It is going to increase or decrease the size of your objects. So we want to increase the size of that plan. So just simply keep moving your mouse. Increase, increase, increase, increase. Let's increase a bit more like this. Or what you could have done, you can also have decreased the size of this class spinning top and heat sink a. Well, that would have worked the same. So let's try doing that. Press control. Now that plan is of that same size, or let's let that plan over here and increase its size a bit, but not too much. Like this. Okay. Let's select this box, press the Control key, select this box to select multiple objects in Blender, you will left to select, press the shift key. Press the shift key, now left lick to select the spinning top and this heat sin. Now all three of those objects are selected. Press S, and then move downward, and as you can see, they are getting smaller. Okay, that is perfect. Let's select this plan again and let's make this a bit larger like this. Okay. So now we have all three or four objects. Okay? Now if we want to create an image, we are going to be needing a camera. Okay? So in Blender, you need a camera to create images. So for creating a camera, you press Shift A once again, just like you created the cube. And this time, we will select this camera option over here. So it sells camera. Create a camera. Okay? Now that camera has been selected. Now, let's say we want to take the image of whatever it is appearing in this view pot. Okay? So first, let's move it around, look at something like this. Okay. So the camera has been created to change our camera or to make our camera look at what we are looking right now, you need to press Control, then press art. Okay. And while you have both of these keys are pressed, as you can see over here on the screen, press the zero key. Okay? And then as you can see, we have this rectangle created over here. Okay. So anything which is inside this rectangle is going to be converted into that photorealistic image. Okay? Now, if you want to put more objects to include everything inside this camera view. This rectangle represents the camera view. We can simply press G and then move around. Or while it is selected, we can use the middle mouse button to zoom in or zoom out. Let's zoom out a bit, press control, art, zero once again. Now if we rote it, we will will be moved out of the camera view. To return to the camera view, simply press zero. Okay, and you will directly be taken to that camera view. So if you want to create another camera view, just zoom out. Press Control t zero. Now everything inside this view is going to be converted into that image. Okay? So let's zoom in a bit. Okay. So like this, move like this. Okay? So now, our camera is ready, objects are ready. Now let's go on to try and create images. Now before we do that, we can create those images, which is the process called rendering by choosing either CPU or GPU. If you have a good GPU, then you can use that GPU. Otherwise, it will only work on CPU. Okay? To enable your GPU, if you have the graphics card, and preferably an NVDA card, MD cards don't generally work well in blender. So what you will have to do, you will have to click on this Edit button, click on preference system, and just select over here your graphic card. So I have RTX 30 70, you can select that. Okay. Then let's click on this button over here, and here we have the render engine. So render engine is basically the algorithm or the software which is going to create or images. So by default, it is going to be EV, which is a bit faster, but I like to work in cycles, which is much more accurate and produces much better images. For device, I will change it to GPU because GPUs, if you have it, it's going to generate images, much, much faster. And if you change it to CPU, your computer will basically freeze while that image is being rendered or created. You will not be able to do anything else. But by using GPU, you can do other things by using CPU while that image is being created. So other things you can select, you can select this button and select the resolution of that image. It is 1920 by 1080. I'll just keep it as that. If you want to change it, you can change that as well. There are many more options, but we are not going to go over that. Okay. So here it is. Now, before creating the image, let's see how this is going to look like if we create an image of. So basically, let's see a preview of our image. So far that simply press Z, and currently it is on solid. Let's change the view more to rendered. Okay? Here. And as you can see, we are not seeing anything. It is not a really good image. And that is because there are two things missing. One, there is no light, and secondly, there are no materials applied to these parts. Okay? So first, let's create a light. Okay? So if you have a good GPUs, you can just stay in the randed mode and create lights and inside material. But if you don't, I recommend moving back to solid view and then create lights, et cetera. Okay? So to create a light, once again, simply press Shift A and click on this light. So you can create three different types of four different types of light. Sorry. You can create a point light, which is a point, and it produces lights in all directions. A sunlight is basically going to work as a sun light in all direction, but very, very harsh light basically, or very bright light. Then you have spotlight, which is only going to enlighten a very small area at a certain spot, then you have the area light, which is going to be rectangular light source and it is going to enlighten a small area. So I'll just create an area light. Light is created. Let's press G and we want to bring it in upward direction. Bring it up over here and here it is. Okay? Now let's change to rendered view, and now we have some light. Okay? So let's make this light a bit smaller, much, much smaller. Smaller larger, sorry. Okay. So the light is much larger. Let's change the rented view. Still we can't see very much. Okay. So over here, this area is the light. It is selected. Then we can move over to this light bulb button. Let's move over here, and here we can select the properties of this light. So currently, its power is ten art. Okay? Let's increase that power. Let's make it 100 vats. Okay. Press Enter. Still we can't see much. Let's make it 1,000 vats. Now there is a little bit of light. Let's make it 5,000 watts, and now we are actually seeing some stuff. Still, it is not a very good image, and now we have the light, but we don't have material. To create material, simply one by one, select your objects. So first of all, we will select this plan, which is the floor, you can just left leg over here or you can go over here and select this plan. Then move over to this option, material, and click on this new button over here. Okay? So now we have the material provided to this flow. Okay. And currently it is principle BSDF, so it is a shadder I recommend just keep it as what it is. Okay. Next, you can select the color. By default, it is white, so left click on that and you can just select whatever colors you like. You can make it green, you can make it dark green, light on this color wheel, you can select whichever color you like. What I'm going to do, I'm going to select this dark blue like this. Okay? Here. Then you have these options like metallic roughness, you can increase the roughness. You can decrease the roughness. Let's keep it somewhere in the middle and you can increase this to make it metallic or not metallic. So if you increase this metallic 0-1, it is going to be completely metallic floor. That material will look like metal. Okay? If you bring it to zero, it will not look like metal, the opposite of metal, whatever that is. Okay. Next, let's select this heat sink and create another material. So obviously it is going to look like a metal because heat sink is going to be made of a metal. So let's bring it to one. Okay. So now, as you can see, it is looking like steel. Okay? So you can change its color. Let's just keep it at what it is. Really, really bright, whitish color. Okay. Then let's select this spinning top, create new material. Let's make this one metallic, as well, but let's give it a color. Let's say red color. Then we can select this glass, create new material. This one is going to be obviously made up of glass. And for that, what you need to do, you need to increase this IOR, which is basically index of reflection. So you can make it glass either that way or instead of principle BSDF where instead of next to the surface, it says principle BSD F, left click and here you have glass BSD, F, click on that. Now it looks like a glass. Okay so let's increase its IR index of reflection so it doesn't look like, let's make it one. Okay. Now it is as you can see, we can just directly see through. Okay. And it doesn't really look good. So let's increase its roughness a bit. Okay. You can also give it a little bit of color. Let's make Blackish, no black doesn't work. Let's make it green. You can select whatever colors you like. Let's keep it as default, and there are other options as well, but they are very, very advanced topics. So let's reduce its stuffness a bit like this. Okay. So right now, we have one light. Let's create another light. So instead of just creating one more light and changing its parameter, simply click this area. Now as you can see the light is selected, press Shift and while holding that shift key, press D. Okay. Now we have one more light created as well. Okay? And that light is selected. So press G now and X to move it over here. You can then rot at it, so that it is lighting the environment from this direction. You can also create a point light. Let's create a point light and put it somewhere over here. Let's increase it to 5,000 watts, it is really illuminating that scene. Let's delete this light, which we just created area 001 because I don't like how it looks, this point light is looking really, really well, as you can see there are really realistic shadows, et cetera, as well. Here it is. Let's bring it over here. You can bring it over here as well. Okay, so let's put it somewhere over here and let's increase its intensity to something like 10,000 watt. Okay. And for this one, let's just keep it where it is. Okay. So now let's change the view, something like this. If you want to, then control art and zero again to make that view put that view directly in the camera. Let's put it up a bit. Okay. So now let's say you want to convert this view into an image. And using this techniques like creating lights, creating materials, and using this combination of these tricks, you can create different types of atmospheres and create really, really very accurate not accurate but really realistic looking as close to realistic as they can be looking atmospheres and scenes to create renderings or rendered photorealistic images, azure objects. Okay. So once you're happy, simply press F 12, and it will take a couple of seconds to create jure image. Okay? So we have selected 4,096 samples. So you can reduce the number of samples if you want to and it will basically require less time if you reduce the number of samples, the time taken to create the image would be less. However, there would be much lower accuracy in your generated image. Okay. So if you have a relatively less GPU with relatively lower performance, you can try lowering that number, and I will just show you how you can do that. So here we have this image created. You can simply press on this image button and save, and you can save it wherever you want. Let's save it on desktop. Untitled. Let's just keep it as untitled. Okay. Let's close this box, move over to desktop, and here it is that image. Okay, so you can do whatever you want for that image. Okay. So basically, this is a bonus lecture, so it does not serve much. So this is how you can create renderings to reduce the samples, you take a look on the render settings, and here under render, it says, M samples of 4,096. Now if I change it to 128, let's say, now if I press F 12, now it can only go up to 128 samples. Okay. And the image created would be much, much faster, but on the opposite side, on the flip side of that, it is going to be less accurate. But most of the time, 99% of the times, you cannot tell what is the difference between one image created with 100 samples or 200 samples and the other image which at 4,000 samples. And what sample number you should select is basically a very, very complex topic. Okay. So blender is a very big software, however, you don't necessarily need to learn everything. You rendered images will look much, much better if you spend time and put effort in learning blender, and it is going to be a very rewarding journey, learning blender. However, it is not recommended. It is recommended, but it is not necessary. The purpose I want or I recommend you for using blender is for your portfolio. So the portfolio is perhaps one of the most important thing for any card designer, engineer, modeler, whatever, for whatever purpose you are creating CAD models, a portfolio is really, really important if you want to be if you want to become professional in computer edit design. And in my experience and in my opinion, a rendered image of your part, irrespective of how much accurate it is or how much photorealistic it is, it is still going to look better than what appears in the free cad viewport. Okay? So if you take a further step after creating your Cad model in free cat, you put them in blender and then create a basic image, something like this and showcase that in your portfolio, I think it is going to look really, really well and will help you a lot. So this is all for this lecture, and that was our final project, a kind of a bonus project, and essentially, it is the end of this course, but there is going to be one more video about some final words and future recommendations for you. So see you in that video. Thank you.